JP2021000393A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress a decline in game amusement.SOLUTION: When a first suggestion performance and a second suggestion performance are executed at a predetermined timing, at least a first specific performance is executed in relation to the first suggestion performance at the predetermined timing, and a specific performance can be executed in a first pattern in which a second specific performance is executed in relation to the second suggestion performance at a timing later than the predetermined timing and in a second pattern in which the first specific performance is executed in relation to the first suggestion performance at the predetermined timing and a third specific performance is executed in relation to the second suggestion performance at a timing later than the predetermined timing. The timing at which the third specific performance is executed is later than the timing at which the second specific performance is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13-17

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there are known game machines that execute pending changes, pseudo-reams, SP reach developments, etc. by opening the displayed present box (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, there is known a gaming machine that displays what suggests the execution of a certain effect as a suggestion image (stock) (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-134097 JP-A-2018-50980

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, although the present box has a plurality of roles (suggestion of execution of pending change, suggestion of execution of pseudo-ream, suggestion of SP reach development, etc.), it has a common display mode. , There were few variations, and the interest was insufficient. In the gaming machine of Patent Document 2, since the effect of the suggestion target and the display mode of the suggestion image have a one-to-one relationship, the effect to be executed later is easily recognized by the suggestion image, which is not sufficiently interesting. there were. In addition, depending on the situation, it is necessary to limit the scenes in which the suggestion image is displayed (when a large number of suggestion target effects are executed, the display of the suggestion image becomes complicated).

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, bonus game, etc.). , It is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects suggesting that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, and a plurality of types of suggestions related to the execution of the specific effect before the specific effect is executed. The effect can be executed, and the plurality of types of the specific effect are predetermined with the first specific effect (for example, the pseudo-continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 13-8, 13-9, etc.) that can be executed at a predetermined timing. The second specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than the timing (for example, the effect of the battle completion shown in FIGS. 13-10, 13-11, etc.) and the second specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing. The plurality of types of the suggestion effects including the three specific effects (for example, the relief effect shown in FIG. 13-12 and the like) include the first suggestion effect (for example, the up card shown in FIG. 13-7 (A)). The second suggestive effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card shown in FIG. 13-7 (B)), which is more expected to be controlled in the advantageous state than the first suggestive effect. Including, when the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) is continuously executed up to a predetermined timing, the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) is related to the first suggestion effect. When a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) can be executed and the first suggestion effect is continuously executed until a timing after a predetermined timing, the first suggestion effect (for example, up) is performed. The second specific effect (for example, the effect of completing a battle) can be executed in relation to the effect using a card (for example, FIG. 13-7 (C), FIGS. 13-9 (G4) to 13-. 9 (L4), FIGS. 13-11 (B3) to 13-11 (G3), 13-14, 13-15, 13-16, 13-17, 13-22, etc.) 2 When the suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card) is continuously executed until a predetermined timing, the first specific effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card) is related to the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card). , Pseudo-continuous notice effect, etc.), and when the second suggestion effect is continuously executed until a timing after a predetermined timing, the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card, etc.) ), The third specific performance It is possible to perform output (for example, relief effect, etc.) (for example, FIGS. 13-7 (C), 13-9 (G5) to 13-9 (L5), 13-12 (B2) to 13 -12 (G2), FIG. 13-13, FIG. 13-15, FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-17, FIG. 13-22, etc.), the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) at a predetermined timing. And the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card) are executed, and at least at a predetermined timing, the first suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the up card) is related to the first suggestion effect. A specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) is executed, and the second specific effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) is related to the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) at a timing after a predetermined timing. In the first pattern (for example, pseudo-continuous production, battle production pattern including battle completion) to execute the battle completion effect, the up card is determined by targeting the pseudo-continuous production, and the cancel card is determined by targeting the battle completion. The first specific effect (for example, pseudo-ream) in relation to the case (see FIGS. 13-14 and 13-16) and the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) at a predetermined timing. Along with executing the advance notice effect, etc., the third specific effect (for example, a relief effect, etc.) is executed in connection with the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect using a cancel card) at a timing after the predetermined timing. In the second pattern (for example, in a battle production pattern including a pseudo-ream effect and a relief effect, an up card is determined by targeting the pseudo-ream effect, and a cancel card is determined by targeting the relief effect (FIGS. 13-13 and 13). The specific effect can be executed by the pattern of -16) and the like, and the timing at which the third specific effect (for example, a relief effect) is executed is the effect of the second specific effect (for example, the effect of completing a battle). Etc.) is executed later (Fig. 13-17, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) The gaming machine of the above (1) may perform the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) in connection with the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card). The first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) is performed in a different manner from the case where the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) is executed in connection with the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card). Pseudo-continuous notice production, etc.) may be executed (Fig. 13-9).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the type of suggestive effect when the first specific effect is executed.

(3) In the game machines of (1) and (2) above, the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) and the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) are executed at a predetermined timing. In the case where only the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card) is executed at the predetermined timing, the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card) is performed at the predetermined timing. The ratio of whether or not the execution is continued until a later timing is different (FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16). For example, before the start of the pseudo-ream effect, the up card and the cancel card are stocked, and when only the cancel card is stocked, the cancel card is stocked after the pseudo-ream effect ends. The ratios shown are not the same (the determination ratios in FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16 are not intentionally made the same). Alternatively, the up card is difficult to determine by targeting the battle completion, and the cancel card is difficult to determine by targeting the pseudo-ream effect. Therefore, when the up card and the cancel card are stocked before the start of the pseudo-ream effect. There is a high possibility that the up card is the target of the pseudo-continuous production, and there is a high possibility that the cancellation card is in stock at the end of the pseudo-continuous production. On the other hand, if only the cancel card is stocked before the start of the pseudo-ream effect, the pseudo-ream effect occurs more frequently than the battle starts (because the pseudo-ream effect is also executed in the normal reach), so it is canceled. It is relatively likely that the card is the target of the pseudo-ream effect, and it is not likely that the cancel card is in stock at the end of the pseudo-ream effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the first suggestion effect is executed.

(4) When the gaming machines of the above (1) to (3) execute the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect), the first suggestion effect (for example, an up-card effect) The ratio to be executed in relation to the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by a cancel card) is different from the ratio to be executed (FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16).

According to such a configuration, the first specific effect can be executed in connection with the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect according to the psychology of the player.

(5) The gaming machines of the above (1) to (4) have a notification effect (for example, an activation effect shown in FIGS. 13-17) for notifying that the specific effect is executed in connection with the suggestion effect. Is feasible (eg, as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (H) -13-24 (F)) in relation to the upcard being stocked (ie, the stocked upcard is in stock). It is possible to display the activation image 011SHHD1 notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed (in connection with being used), as shown in FIGS. 13-25 (C) to 13-25 (H). , It is possible to display the activation image 011SHHD2 notifying that the battle is completed in connection with the stock of the cancel card (that is, in relation to the use of the stocked cancel card). Also, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 (A) to 13-23 (G), in relation to the stock of upcards (that is, in relation to the use of stocked upcards). It is possible to display the activation image 011SHHD1 notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-31 (F) to 13-32 (E), cancellation cards are stocked. In connection with (that is, in connection with the use of the stocked cancel card), the activation image 011SHHD2 notifying that the relief effect is executed can be displayed), and the suggestion effect is executed. The notification effect can be executed even when the notification effect is not performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-30 (B) to 13-30 (G), when the upcard is not stocked (that is, that is). Even when the up card is used as an emergency activation), the activation image 011SHHD1 can be displayed), and if the notification effect is executed when the suggestion effect is not executed, the predetermined expected value or more The specific effect of is executed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 13-15, the determination ratio of targeting the pseudo-continuous production without stocking the up card is 12% for the normal reach (missing) and 15% for the normal reach (big hit). Yes, the percentage of decisions to stock up cards and target them for pseudo-continuous production is 73% (26% + 47%) for normal reach (missing) and 70% (25% + 45%) for normal reach (big hit). .. Therefore, the reliability of the pseudo-ream effect when an unstocked upcard is used and the pseudo-ream effect is executed is the pseudo-ream when the non-stock upcard is used and the pseudo-ream effect is executed. Higher than the reliability of the production. In other words, when a non-stocked up card is used and a pseudo-ream effect is executed, the reliability of the jackpot by the pseudo-ream effect is a predetermined value expected value (a pseudo-ream effect using a stocked up card). The reliability of the jackpot by the pseudo-continuous production when is executed) or more.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

(6) In the gaming machines of the above (1) to (5), the suggestion effect can be started at a plurality of types of timings, and is executed at any timing according to the type of the suggestion effect. The ratio of whether to start is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16, the determination ratio of the display (stock) timing differs depending on the type of card, and the ratio of determining the timing to be displayed (stocked) differs depending on the type of card. , The rate of determination of when to use (ie target) is different).

According to such a configuration, since the suggestion effect is executed at various timings during the game, it is possible to give a sense of expectation at various timings.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example and setting example about a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the hit probability of the game machine which concerns on a feature part 027SH. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern of the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the advance notice production. This is an example of each notice production. This is an example of each notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the item image production. This is a display example of each item image. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the item image production. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting value suggestion in the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting value suggestion in the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the advance notice production. This is an example of a notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice production. This is a display example of a present box image or the like. This is a display example of a present box image or the like. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination rate of whether or not the present box is executed. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect, eye-catching effect). It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination rate of whether or not the heat character effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of whether or not the eye-catching effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing A which decides about the advance notice production and the present box production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing A which decides about the advance notice production and the present box production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing A which decides about the advance notice production and the present box production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process B for determining a setting suggestion effect (heat character effect, eye-catching effect). It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern of the game machine which concerns on a feature part 011SH. This is an example of the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the battle production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the battle production. This is an example of each scene of the battle production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the decision ratio of a battle production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the item image production. This is an example of a production operation related to a pseudo-continuous notice production. This is an example of a production operation related to a pseudo-continuous notice production. This is an example of a production operation related to the title display of a battle production. This is an example of a production operation related to the title display of a battle production. This is an example of a production operation related to a relief production. This is an example of the determination rate of the presence / absence, type, and acquisition timing of items that target relief. This is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence, type, and acquisition timing of items that target the start of battle. This is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence, type, and acquisition timing of items targeting pseudo-ren. This is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence, type, and acquisition timing of items targeting pseudo-ren. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing which decides about a pseudo-ream, a battle production pattern, and an item. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing which decides about a pseudo-ream, a battle production pattern, and an item. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the first and second major winning openings (attackers) occupy. It is a ratio. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in a vertically long square frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The advance notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a lookahead advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous notice effect may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied by a power supply board 17 to electric components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) intervals, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the lookahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the ball output rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed in the special figure of "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value different from the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the lookahead advance notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the lookahead advance notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part related to the setting suggestion effect)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In this feature unit, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined ratio during execution of the variable display.

FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination process makes it possible to determine the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggestion effect.

After the advance notice effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S203). The effect control pattern may include an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various effect executions. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as the usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result by the advance notice effect determination process in step S202. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be.

When the effect control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Set the value (step S204). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and other hold numbers "2" to The hold display in the display area corresponding to "4" or the like is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of reserved memories is "0", the hold display is not updated and the active display area is displayed. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221). Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed can be determined based on, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

If the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "missing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "miss", the fixed decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is used in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of big hit. The final stop symbol at the time of a big hit is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". At the time of super reach when the variable display result becomes "miss", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a big hit where the variable display result is a "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the big hit.

At the time of super reach, the same (matching) decorative symbols are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing". It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that make up such a reach loss combination and a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbol that can be determined as the reach symbol may include a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers may be only an effect image showing the numbers, or may be an effect image showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to a reach symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the reach symbol. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 are the highest. As a result, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 As the number becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol becomes higher, and the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. In such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the highest, and 6 As the number becomes the number of, 5 number, 4 number, 3 number, and 2 number, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is low. Therefore, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is the lowest. In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". The number of determined judgment values assigned to each decorative symbol as a reach symbol may be different, or the number of assigned determination values may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol to be a reach symbol. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed (step S225). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect or "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined that "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is determined (step S226). When it is determined that "no effect" is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 may receive a set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern can be selected from a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-3 shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, in the ROM 121, the table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 10-3 is stored in advance as the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01 or the like. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination rate of "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". ..

FIG. 10-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion contents of these setting suggestion patterns differ depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed and the display color when the symbol display color is changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is a normal display color. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, and suggests that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. The pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to suggest the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 10-4 (B) shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 10-4 (B) as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11 or the like. In the determination table TA11, there is a portion in which the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-0, the expectation level which is an advantageous setting value for the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. It is confirmed that there is. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach symbol includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of the jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and 7 It includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of a jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number and suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed. The suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state will be continuously provided, and the suggestions regarding the set value will be provided.

The setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-1, so that the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. Is different whether or not is changed to copper color. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-3, so that the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, the symbol display color is gold as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6. Whether or not it is changed to is different.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image or any other effect image, output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, these. The production mode by any production device, such as a combination of a part or all, may be changed. For the setting suggestion effect and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data combining these are predetermined for executing the effect. It may be feasible if it satisfies a single or multiple conditional expressions. The effect of changing the pattern display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, and blinked. It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as the movable body 32, or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step S242). In the case of the advance notice effect period (step S242; Yes), the control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step S243). When it is not the advance notice effect period (step S242; No), or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step S244). In the case of the reach effect period (step S244; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step S245). When the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is stopped and displayed by the control of step S245 and then the reach effect after the symbol display color is changed is executed, the control of the jackpot game state is suggested and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. Can make suggestions regarding set values.

When it is not the reach effect period (step S244; No), or after the control of step S245 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be predetermined as an execution period of the effect of changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. In the case of the change effect period (step S246; Yes), the control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). When it is not the change effect period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined in response to the fluctuation pattern, the decorative pattern is variable. After performing control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to a different time length depending on the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of 2, the change effect period may be set to a third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. Generally, when an effect (advantageous effect) for notifying an advantage is executed, a player takes an image or a video of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on websites that require membership registration such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for productions that are often performed even in disadvantageous cases (disadvantageous productions), since the motivation for shooting is not motivated, if the execution period of the disadvantageous productions is long, the player is rather uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of the unfavorable effect is shorter than that of the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. As a result, when an effect that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it, and it is possible to secure a shooting time. In addition, by securing the shooting time, the shot images and moving images can be published by the player on the Internet, and the public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, by disclosing the images taken by which pachinko machine 1 in which game field, the game field was advertised by the players from the game field side. become. As described above, by securing the shooting time when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game hall side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the effect processing during variable display ends and waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When a symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display effect process is terminated.

FIG. 10-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 10-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. When the decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 7 are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right", the reach is established and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. FIG. 10-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102, which is a reach development in which the reach effect of the normal reach shifts to the reach effect of the super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed, and the effect image in the reach effect of the super reach is displayed. FIG. 10-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed. The effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed by superimposing it on the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed. In addition, by displaying an effect image for notifying a message such as "change the symbol display color !!", it is suggested to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 10-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 10-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color is changed to copper color by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 10-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2. FIG. 10-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the reach pattern is not changed by the pattern RE-0, and is not changed as the normal display color of red. In this way, the failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to copper by the pattern RE-1, which suggests that the set value is 2 or more. In the effect execution example HD113, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2, which suggests that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3, which suggests the determination of 6, which is the highest set value.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect suggests the jackpot expectation by any effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead notice effect, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be able to make suggestions about. During the execution of the variable display, it may be possible to give a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after giving a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. When executing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed and pachinko. It may include the case of giving a suggestion regarding the set value of the game machine 1. When executing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion ends, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related. It may include the case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

While the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be given, while the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (effect corresponding to the first round and the second round, etc.). You may make a suggestion about the setting value of 1. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, or with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, make suggestions for controlling a state that is different from the jackpot gaming state and is advantageous to the player. It may be a thing. For example, it may be a suggestion about a probability change state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

(Explanation of feature section 027SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 027SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 027SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH includes a game control means and an effect executing means. The game control means is realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. The effect executing means can execute various effects (for example, various notice effects, item image effects, etc., which will be described later).

FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 11-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has a general winning opening 10 arranged in the left gaming area of the gaming board 2, and a passing gate 41 in the right gaming area. A variable winning ball device 6B, a general winning opening 10, and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. Further, a winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5. Further, a plurality of obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area can win a prize in the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area is a variable winning ball. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH is provided with a movable body 027SH 32, which is an accessory, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Since the other configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH in the gaming board 2 are the same as the configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the gaming board 2 shown in FIG. 1, the illustration and description will be omitted. For example, in FIG. 11-1, the first hold indicator 25A and the like are omitted.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hit probability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH. Specifically, FIG. 11-2 (A) shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value (set values "1" to "6") when the gaming state is in the low probability state. FIG. 11-2 (B) shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value (set values “1” to “6”) when the gaming state is in the highly accurate state. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH is classified into a gaming state (whether it is in a low probability state or a high probability state) and a set value (a set value “1” to “6”). In addition, a plurality of types of display result judgment tables for special figures corresponding to each (for each, the big hit judgment value and the small hit probability so as to be the big hit probability and the small hit probability as shown in FIGS. 12 types of display result determination tables for special figures to which hit determination values are assigned) are stored. For example, the CPU 103 determines the above-mentioned plurality of types of display result for special figures in the winning random number value determination process. It is sufficient to judge whether it is a big hit or a small hit (whether it is a miss) by using one of the corresponding special figure display result determination tables.

FIG. 11-2 (C) shows the types of jackpots. FIG. 11-2 (D) shows the distribution of jackpots for the first special symbol. FIG. 11-2 (E) shows the distribution of jackpots for the second special symbol. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has a plurality of types of jackpot type determination tables (each of which corresponds to each of the special symbols (whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol)). , The judgment value corresponding to the first big hit, the judgment value corresponding to the second big hit, and the judgment value corresponding to the third big hit are assigned so as to be sorted as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D) and 11-2 (E). Two types of jackpot type determination tables) are stored. For example, when the CPU 103 determines in the winning random number value determination process that a jackpot will be achieved based on the special figure display result determination table, the above-mentioned plurality of The type of jackpot (big hit type) may be determined by using one of the jackpot type determination tables corresponding to the type.

FIG. 11-3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH. FIG. 11-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times). Fluctuation pattern # 10 is a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern # 11 is a non-reach out-of-reach (for shortening) fluctuation pattern. Fluctuation pattern # 12 is a fluctuation pattern that is out of normal reach. Fluctuation pattern # 13 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 14 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 15 is a fluctuation pattern of small hits. Fluctuation pattern # 16 is a fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot. Fluctuation pattern # 17 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes a big hit. Fluctuation pattern # 18 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes a big hit.

FIG. 11-3 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern. The expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach. The jackpot expectation of a certain effect a is, for example, (probability that effect a is executed when it becomes a big hit) × (probability that it becomes a big hit) / {(probability that effect a is executed when it becomes a big hit) × ( Calculated by (probability of becoming a big hit) + (probability that production a is executed when a big hit does not occur) x (probability of not becoming a big hit)} (when the expected degree of big hit becomes "1", it is always "big hit" Become).

For example, the reliability of Super Reach A is (0.3 × 1/320) / {(0.3 × 1/320) + (0.009 × 319/320)} = about when the set value is 1. It is 9.5%. Further, the reliability of Super Reach A is (0.3 × 1/295) / {(0.3 × 1/295) + (0.009 × 294/295)} = about when the set value is 6. It is 10.2%.

Further, the reliability of Super Reach B is (0.6 × 1/320) / {(0.6 × 1/320) + (0.001 × 319/320)} = about when the set value is 1. It is 65.3%. Further, the reliability of Super Reach B is (0.6 × 1/295) / {(0.6 × 1/295) + (0.001 × 294/295)} = about when the set value is 6. It is 67.1%.

According to the example of FIG. 11-3 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 11 is not determined during the low base, but the fluctuation pattern # 11 is determined even during the low base according to, for example, the number of reserved memories. It may be. Further, according to the example of FIG. 11-3 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 10 is not determined during the high base, but the fluctuation pattern # 10 is determined even during the high base according to, for example, the number of reserved memories. It may be.

FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the advance notice effect. 11-5 and 11-6 are production examples of the respective notice effects. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects as shown in FIG. 11-4. In this embodiment, each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be specified by the advance notice effect patterns.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" shown in FIG. 11-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) as a notice effect (cut-in notice effect / display of a weak cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A1”. , Weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" shown in FIG. 11-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of a strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B) as a notice effect (cut-in notice effect / display of a strong cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A2”. , Strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" shown in FIG. 11-4 is a group notice effect (display of a group image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH displays a group image 027SHYKE-GN as, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C), as a notice effect (group notice effect) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-B”. To do.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" shown in FIG. 11-4 is a button notice effect (display of button image → press → weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B), for example, as a notice effect (button notice effect / display of a weak cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C1”. Such as the button image 027SHYKE-BU and the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI are displayed. The weak cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the weak cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" shown in FIG. 11-4 is a button notice effect (display of button image → press → strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIGS. 11-6 (C) and 11-6 (D), for example, as a notice effect (button notice effect / display of a strong cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C2”. Such, the button image 027SHYKE-BU and the strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI are displayed. The strong cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the strong cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

The advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-D" shown in FIG. 11-4 is an accessory advance notice effect (operation of the accessory). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has, for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (E) (F) (G), as a notice effect (operation of the accessory) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-D”. The movable body 027SH32 is operated.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice effect and the like. FIG. 11-7 (A) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image or display of a strong cut-in image). According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the super reach is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern is either # 13 or # 14), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, and the super reach jackpot is determined. In the case of (when either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18 is obtained), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 50%. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH executes a cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach loss, which allocates 40% of the total as a judgment value corresponding to execution existence, and 50% of the total. The cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the super reach jackpot, which is assigned as the judgment value corresponding to Yes, is stored. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is for super reach loss when the super reach is lost. Use the cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table to determine whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect, and if it becomes a super reach jackpot, use the cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the super reach jackpot. You may decide whether or not to execute the effect. The same applies to the determination of whether or not to execute other notice effects (group notice effect, button notice effect, character advance notice effect). If the super reach does not occur (if any of the fluctuation patterns # 10, # 11, # 12, # 15, and # 16), the execution status is determined at a rate of 0% (determine not to execute). ).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the cut-in notice effect, it determines the notice effect pattern (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) related to the cut-in notice effect. FIG. 11-7 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the notice effect pattern (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) of the cut-in notice effect when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the super reach is lost, the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is 20. Determined at a rate of%. In the case of a super reach jackpot, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 80%. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH allocates 80% of the whole as a determination value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" and 20% of the whole corresponds to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2". The cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach loss assigned as the judgment value, 20% of the whole is assigned as the judgment value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1", and 80% of the whole is the notice effect pattern " The cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach jackpot assigned as the determination value corresponding to "YEP-A2" is stored. For example, the effect control CPU 120 super reach when the super reach is lost. Use the cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for out-of-order to determine the advance notice effect pattern for the cut-in advance notice effect, and if it becomes a super reach jackpot, cut in using the cut-in advance notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach jackpot. The notice production pattern of the notice effect may be determined. The same applies to the determination of the advance notice effect pattern of other advance notice effects (button advance notice effects).

FIG. 11-7 (C) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the group notice effect (display of the group image). According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), when the super reach is out of order, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 20%, and when the super reach jackpot is achieved, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 50%. To do. Further, since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the group advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-B"), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the group advance notice effect. The advance notice effect pattern "YEP-B" is determined as the advance notice effect pattern related to the effect. If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

FIG. 11-7 (D) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the button notice effect (display of button image → press → display of weak cut-in image, or display of button image → press → display of strong cut-in image). This is an example. According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (D), when the super reach is out of order, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 10%, and when the super reach jackpot is achieved, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 50%. To do. If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the button notice effect, it determines the notice effect patterns (“YEP-C1”, “YEP-C2”) related to the button notice effect. FIG. 11-7 (E) is an example of the determination ratio of the advance notice effect patterns (“YEP-C1” and “YEP-C2”) related to the button advance notice effect when it is decided to execute the button advance notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (E), when the super reach is out of order, the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 90%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" is set to 10. Determined at a rate of%. Further, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" is determined at a rate of 90%.

FIG. 11-7 (F) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the bonus notice effect (movement of the bonus). According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (F), when the super reach is out of order, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the super reach jackpot is achieved, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 75%. To do. In addition, since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the character advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-D"), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the character advance notice effect, The notice effect pattern "YEP-D" is determined as the advance notice effect pattern related to the character advance notice effect. If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

According to FIG. 11-7, in the case of super reach, a maximum of four types of advance notice effects are executed.

In addition, the probability that the cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image or display of strong cut-in image) will be executed when it becomes super reach is {(probability of loss × super reach when it is out). Probability of becoming x Probability of performing a cut-in notice effect when the super reach is off) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach when a big hit x Super reach The cut-in notice effect is executed when a big hit Probability)} / {(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit)} When the set value is 1, { (319/320 x 1% x 40%) + (1/320 x 90% x 50%)} / {(319/320 x 1%) + (1/320 x 90%)} = about 42%. ..

In addition, the probability that the group notice effect (display of the group image) will be executed when the super reach is reached is {(probability of losing x probability of becoming super reach when out of the way x group notice effect when the super reach is out of the way). Probability of being executed) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit x Probability of executing a group notice effect at the time of a super reach big hit)} / {(Probability of being missed x Probability of being missed) (Probability of becoming a super reach) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit)} When the set value is 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 20%) + (1) / 320 × 90% × 50%)} / {(319/320 × 1%) + (1/320 × 90%)} = about 26%.

In addition, the probability that the button notice effect (display of button image-> press-> display of weak cut-in image or display of button image-> press-> display of strong cut-in image) will be executed at the time of super reach is { (Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when missing x Probability of executing button notice effect when super reach is out) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit x Super reach Probability that the button notice effect will be executed at the time of a big hit)} / {(Probability of becoming a miss x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit)} Calculated from, in the case of the set value 1, {(319/320 × 1% × 10%) + (1/320 × 90% × 50%)} / {(319/320 × 1%) + (1/320) × 90%)} = about 19%.

In addition, the probability that the character advance notice effect (action of the character) will be executed when it becomes super reach is {(probability of losing x probability of becoming super reach when it is out x character when it is out of super reach). Probability of executing the notice effect) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit x Probability of executing the character advance notice effect at the time of a super reach big hit)} / {(Probability of losing) Calculated from (probability of becoming a super reach when out of the game) + (probability of becoming a big hit x probability of becoming a super reach when a big hit)}, when the set value is 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 5%) + (1/320 x 90% x 75%)} / {(319/320 x 1%) + (1/320 x 90%)} = about 20%.

FIG. 11-8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the item image effect. FIG. 11-9 is a display example of each item image. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute a plurality of types of item image effects as shown in FIG. 11-8 (A).

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-A" shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) is an item image suggesting that the cut-in advance notice effect (YEP-A1 or YEP-A2) is executed. It is an item image effect A that displays A. In other words, the item image A displayed in the item image effect A can specify the type of advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the cut-in advance notice effect).

In the item image effect A, the strength (high or low reliability) of suggestion that the cut-in notice effect is executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image A.

Specifically, the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A of the first display mode suggests whether the cut-in notice effect is executed with low reliability. The item image 027SHIGALV1 shown in FIG. 11-9 (A) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the first display mode (level 1) of the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D) is blue.

The item image A of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A in the second display mode suggests whether the cut-in notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGALV2 shown in FIG. 11-9 (B) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the second display mode (level 2) of the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D) is green.

The item image A of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the cut-in notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGALV3 shown in FIG. 11-9 (C) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the third display mode (level 3) of the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D) is red.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-B" shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) is an item that displays an item image B suggesting that the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. Image production B. In other words, the item image B displayed in the item image effect B can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the group advance notice effect).

In the item image effect B, the strength (high or low reliability) of suggestion that the group notice effect is executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image B.

Specifically, the item image B of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B of the first display mode suggests whether the group notice effect is executed with low reliability. The item image 027SHIGBLV1 shown in FIG. 11-9 (D) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image B.

The item image B of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B of the second display mode suggests whether the group notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGBLV2 shown in FIG. 11-9 (E) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image B.

The item image B of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B of the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the group notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGBLV3 shown in FIG. 11-9 (F) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image B.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-C" shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) suggests that the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1 or YEP-C2) is executed. Is an item image effect C for displaying. In other words, the item image C displayed in the item image effect C can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the button advance notice effect).

In the item image effect C, the strength (high or low reliability) of suggestion that the button notice effect is executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image C.

Specifically, the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C of the first display mode suggests whether the button notice effect is executed with low reliability. The item image 027SHIGCLV1 shown in FIG. 11-9 (G) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image C.

The item image C of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C in the second display mode suggests whether the button notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGCLV2 shown in FIG. 11-9 (H) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image C.

The item image C of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the button notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGCLV3 shown in FIG. 11-9 (I) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image C.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-D" shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) displays the item image D suggesting that the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. Item image production D. In other words, the item image D displayed in the item image effect D can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the character advance notice effect).

In the item image effect D, the strength (high or low reliability) of suggestion that the character advance notice effect is executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image D.

Specifically, the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV1 shown in FIG. 11-9 (J) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image D.

The item image D of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the second display mode suggests whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGDLV2 shown in FIG. 11-9 (K) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image D.

The item image D of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV3 shown in FIG. 11-9 (L) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image D.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has an item image effect A (IGEP-A), an item image effect B (IGEP-B), and an item image effect C (IGEP-C) shown in FIG. 11-8 (A). , Item image effect D (IGEP-D) 4 types of item image effect, 1 of 4 types may not be executed, or only 1 of 4 types may be executed. Two of the four types may be executed, three of the four types may be executed, or all four types may be executed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can change the display mode of the item image to be displayed in the item image production. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute the item image effect that changes the display mode of the item image. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH may change the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) during the execution of the item image effect A. It is possible. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute the item image effect A that changes the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2). is there. The same applies to the item image effect B, the item image effect C, and the item image effect D.

FIG. 11-8 (B) shows the contents of the item image effect execution mode pattern. The item image production execution mode pattern is common to each item image production (item image production A, item image production B, item image production C, item image production D), and is one of the item image productions for each item image production. Item image effect execution mode pattern is determined (details will be described later).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern that does not execute the item image effect. Since the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" does not execute the item image effect, the item image is not displayed.

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). This is an item image effect execution mode pattern that does not change as it is in 1).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). This is an item image effect execution mode pattern for changing from 1) to the second display mode (level 2).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP4” shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). It is an item image effect execution mode pattern that changes from 1) to the second display mode (level 2) and further changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP5” shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). This is an item image effect execution mode pattern for changing from 1) to the third display mode (level 3).

Therefore, although the details will be described later, for example, the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined for the item image effect A (IGEP-A), and the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEP-B” is determined for the item image effect B (IGEP-B). "IGEGP1" is determined, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined for the item image effect C (IGEP-C), and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined for the item image effect D (IGEP-D). If so, the item image effect A (IGEP-A) that changes the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2), and the display mode of the item image C. The item image effect C (IGEP-C) that does not change the first display mode (level 1) and the display mode of the item image D are changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). The item image effect D (IGEP-D) to be caused is executed (the item image effect B is not executed).

FIG. 11-10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the item image effect and the like. 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A). Specifically, FIG. 11-10 (A) shows the item image effect execution of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed in the super reach. This is an example of the determination ratio of the aspect pattern. FIG. 11-10 (B) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is not executed in the super reach. This is an example.

11-10 (C) and 11-10 (D) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B). Specifically, FIG. 11-10 (C) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed in the super reach. This is an example. FIG. 11-10 (D) is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when the group notice effect (YEP-B) is not executed in the super reach.

11-10 (E) and 11-10 (F) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C). Specifically, FIG. 11-10 (E) shows an item image effect execution mode of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is executed in the super reach. This is an example of the pattern determination ratio. FIG. 11-10 (F) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is not executed in the super reach. This is an example.

11-10 (G) and 11-10 (H) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D). Specifically, FIG. 11-10 (G) determines the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed in the super reach. This is an example of the ratio. FIG. 11-10 (H) is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed in the super reach. ..

According to FIG. 11-10, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A that displays the item image A and suggests the execution of the cut-in notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect A is executed or the item The display mode of the item image A when the image effect A is executed) is determined by whether or not the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed. Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B that displays the item image B and suggests the execution of the group notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect B is executed or the item image effect B is executed) is executed. The display mode of the item image B in the case) is determined by whether or not the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C that displays the item image C and suggests the execution of the button notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect C is executed or the item image effect C is executed) is executed. The display mode of the item image C in the case) is determined by whether or not the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is executed. Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D that displays the item image D and suggests the execution of the character advance notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect D is executed or the item image effect D is executed). The display mode of the item image D in this case) is determined by whether or not the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed.

As specific examples, the reliability of the suggestion of the cut-in notice effect for each display mode of the item image A displayed in the item image effect A, and the button notice effect for each display mode of the item image C displayed in the item image effect C. The reliability of the suggestion will be explained.

(Reliability of suggestion of cut-in notice effect for each display mode of item image A)
According to FIGS. 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B), the final display mode of the item image A is the third display mode (level 3), which is the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP4”. Is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 50% (FIG. 11-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, 10%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 11-10 (B)). The reliability of the cut-in notice effect when the final display mode of the item image A in the super reach is the third display mode is, for example, (when the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the third display mode Item image A is finally displayed) × (Probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach) / {Item image of the third display mode when the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach Probability that A is finally displayed) × (Probability that cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach) + (Item image A in the third display mode is final when cut-in notice effect is not executed in super reach) Probability displayed in) × (Probability that the cut-in notice effect is not executed in Super Reach)}. When 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice effect when the final display mode of the item image A is the third display mode in the super reach. The reliability is (50% × 42%) / {(50% × 42%) + (10% × 58%)} = about 78%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 30% (FIG. 11-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, 20%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 11-10 (B)). Therefore, when 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the second display mode in the super reach. The reliability of the production is (30% × 42%) / {(30% × 42%) + (20% × 58%)} = about 52%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 20% (FIG. 11-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, 60%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 11-10 (B)). Therefore, when 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the first display mode in the super reach. The reliability of the production is (20% × 42%) / {(20% × 42%) + (60% × 58%)} = about 19%.

(Reliability of suggestion of button notice effect for each display mode of item image C)
According to FIGS. 11-10 (E) and 11-10 (F), the final display mode of the item image C is the third display mode (level 3), which is the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP4”. Or when "IGEGP5" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5" is determined at a rate of 70% in total (FIG. 11-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 5% (FIG. 11-10 (F)). The reliability of the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the third display mode is, for example, (the item of the third display mode when the button notice effect is executed in the super reach). Probability that image C is finally displayed) × (Probability that button notice effect is executed in super reach) / {Item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed when button notice effect is executed in super reach. (Probability of being displayed in) × (Probability that the button notice effect is executed in Super Reach) + (Probability that the item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed when the button notice effect is not executed in Super Reach) It is calculated by × (probability that the button notice effect is not executed in Super Reach)}. When 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the reliability of the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the third display mode. Is (70% × 19%) / {(70% × 19%) + (5% × 81%)} = about 77%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 15% (FIG. 11-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the item image effect is determined at a rate of 10%. The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined (FIG. 11-10 (F)). Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the second display mode. The reliability is (15% × 19%) / {(15% × 19%) + (10% × 81%)} = about 26%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 10% (FIG. 11-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 65%. The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” is determined (FIG. 11-10 (F)). Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the first display mode. The reliability is (10% × 19%) / {(10% × 19%) + (65% × 81%)} = about 3.5%.

11-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, FIGS. 11-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display timing of various item images, the execution timing of various notice effects, and the like in the variable display that becomes super reach.

In FIGS. 11-11, T0 is the start timing of the variable display. T1 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T2 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 11-9 (A)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image A is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T2.

T3 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 11-9 (D)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image B is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T3.

T4 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 11-9 (G)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image C is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T4.

T5 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 11-9 (J)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image D is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T5.

T6 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 11-9 (B)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect A is the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode in the T6. It changes to (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T6 (the first display mode (level 1)). Will remain).

T7 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 11-9 (E)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect B in the T7 is the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode. It changes to (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T7 (the first display mode (level 1)). Will remain).

T8 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 11-9 (H)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect C in the T8 is the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode. It changes to (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T8 (the first display mode (level 1)). Will remain).

T9 is a timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 11-9 (K)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect D in the T9 is from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode. It changes to (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T8 (the first display mode (level 1)). Will remain).

T10 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 11-9 (C)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect A in the T10 is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A changes to "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect A changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level) in the T10. It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T10 (the first display mode (level 1) remains). .. Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T10 (the second display mode (level 2) remains). ..

T11 is a timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 11-9 (F)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect B in the T11 is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect B in the T11 is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level). It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T11 (the first display mode (level 1) remains). .. Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T11 (the second display mode (level 2) remains). ..

T12 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 11-9 (I)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect C in the T12 is changed from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C in the T12 is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level). It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T12 (the first display mode (level 1) remains). .. Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T12 (the second display mode (level 2) remains). ..

T13 is a timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 11-9 (L)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect D in the T13 is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D in the T13 is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level). It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T13 (the first display mode (level 1) remains). .. Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T13 (the second display mode (level 2) remains). ..

T14 is the deletion timing (timing used as an item) of the item image A. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2", the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect A is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image A of the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image A of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

Further, T14 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). T15 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T14 to T15 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T15 is also a timing to start execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). T16 is a timing for ending the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). That is, T15 to T16 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2).

T17 is the deletion timing of the item image B. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the item image B of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect B is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image B of the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image B of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

Further, T17 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B). T18 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T17 to T18 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T18 is also a timing to start execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). T19 is the timing to end the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). That is, T18 to T19 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B).

T20 is the deletion timing of the item image C. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect C is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image C of the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image C of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

Further, T20 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T21 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T20 to T21 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T21 is also a timing to start execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T22 is a timing at which the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is finished. That is, T21 to T22 are execution periods of the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2).

T23 is the deletion timing of the item image D. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect D is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image D of the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image D of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

In addition, T23 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). T24 is a timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T23 to T24 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T24 is also a timing for starting the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). T25 is the timing at which the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is finished. That is, T24 to T25 are execution periods of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D).

11-12 and 11-13 are specific examples of various timings. In FIG. 11-12 (A), only the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed as the advance notice effect, and only the item image effect A (IGEP-A) is executed as the item image effect. When executed in "IGEGP4" (that is, item image effect B (IGEP-B), item image effect C (IGEP-C) and item image effect D (IGEP-D) are in the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1". It is explanatory drawing explaining the display timing of the item image A, the execution timing of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), etc. in (in a case).

In FIG. 11-12 (A), T2 to T6 are periods during which the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T6 to T10 are periods during which the item image A of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed. T10 to T14 are periods during which the item image A of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. T15 to T16 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), that is, a period during which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 11-5 (A)) is displayed.

In FIG. 11-12 (B), nothing is executed as the advance notice effect, and the item image effect A (IGEP-A), the item image effect C (IGEP-C), and the item image effect D (IGEP) are used as the item image effect. Item image A, in the case where each of −D) is executed by the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” (when the item image effect B (IGEP-B) is the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”), It is explanatory drawing explaining the display timing of the item image C, the item image D, and the like.

In FIG. 11-12 (B), T2 to T14 are periods during which the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. In addition, the cut-in notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T4 to T20 are periods during which the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. It should be noted that the button notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T5 to T23 are periods during which the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T23 to T24 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the character advance notice effect. It should be noted that the character advance notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect.

In FIG. 11-13 (A), a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), a group notice effect (YEP-B), and a button notice effect (YEP-C1) are executed as the advance notice effects, and the item image effect is an item. Each of the image effect A (IGEP-A) and the item image effect B (IGEP-B) is executed by the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3", and the item image effect C (IGEP-C) is the item image effect execution mode pattern. Display of item image A, item image B, item image C, and item image D when the item image effect D (IGEP-D) is executed by the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2". It is explanatory drawing explaining the execution timing of the timing, the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), the group notice effect (YEP-B), the button notice effect (YEP-C1), and the like.

In FIG. 11-13 (A), T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. The item image A is erased in T14, but the display mode of the item image A immediately before being erased is the second display mode (level 2). T15 to T16 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), that is, a period during which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 11-5 (A)) is displayed. T17 to T18 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect. The item image B is erased at T17, but the display mode of the item image B immediately before being erased is the second display mode (level 2). T18 to T19 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B), that is, a period during which the group image 027SHYKE-GN (see FIG. 11-5 (C)) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. The item image C is erased at T20, but the display mode of the item image C immediately before being erased is the third display mode (level 3). In T21 to T22, the execution period of the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1), that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 11-6 (A)) is displayed (push button while the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed). When 31B is operated, it is a period in which a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 11-6 (B) is displayed) instead of the button image 027SHYKE-BU). T23 to T24 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the character advance notice effect. The item image D is erased in T23, but the display mode of the item image D immediately before being erased is the first display mode (level 1). It should be noted that the character advance notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect.

In FIG. 11-13 (B), the button notice effect (YEP-C2) and the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) are executed as the advance notice effects, and only the item image effect C (IGEP-C) is executed as the item image effect. Is executed in the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" (that is, when item image effect A (IGEP-A), item image effect B (IGEP-B) and item image effect D (IGEP-D) are item images. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display timing of the item image C, the execution timing of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), etc. in the effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1").

In FIG. 11-13 (B), T4 to T12 are periods during which the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T12 to T20 are periods during which the item image C of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. In T21 to T22, the execution period of the button advance notice effect (YEP-C2), that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 11-6 (C)) is displayed (push button while the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed). When 31B is operated, it is a period in which the strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI (see FIG. 11-6 (D) is displayed) instead of the button image 027SHYKE-BU). T24 to T25 are execution periods of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), that is, periods during which the movable body 027SH32 is operated (see FIGS. 11-6 (E) to 11-6 (G)). In the example of FIG. 11-13 (B), there is neither a display of the item image D suggesting whether the character advance notice effect is executed nor an execution of the fanning effect to incite whether to execute the character advance notice effect. An object notice effect (YEP-D) is being executed. Specifically, when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" is determined when the character advance notice effect is executed (see FIG. 11-10 (G)), it is determined whether the character advance notice effect is executed. Neither the display of the suggesting item image D nor the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the character advance notice effect is executed, and the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed.

11-14 and 11-15 show the effect determination process (effect determination process for determining the advance notice effect, item image effect, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example. The flowchart of FIG. 11-15 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 11-14.

In the effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-14, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS100). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (either fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is executed at a rate of 40%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 50%, and the fluctuation pattern is other than the above (variation patterns # 10, # 11, # 12). , # 15, # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is determined to be executed (step 027SHS101). If it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS101; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS102. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS101; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS105.

Following step 027SHS101 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS102). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 80%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP". -A2 "is determined by 20%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 20% and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 80%.

Following step 027SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" or advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2") of the cut-in advance notice effect determined in step 027SHS102 (step). 027SHS103).

Following step 027SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) as a case of executing the cut-in notice effect (step 027SHS104). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (A), the effect control CPU 120 has 0% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1", 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2", and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 30%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 50%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS101 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) as a case where the cut-in notice effect is not executed (step). 027SHS105). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 60% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 10%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) determined in step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105 (step 027SHS106).

Following step 027SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the group notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS110). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach at a rate of 20%, and executes if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execution Yes is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS110, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step 027SHS111). If it is determined that the group notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS111; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS113. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS111; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS115.

Following step 027SHS111, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-B” for the group advance notice effect (step 027SHS113).

Following step 027SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case of executing the group notice effect (step 027SHS114). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (C), the effect control CPU 120 has 0% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1", 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2", and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 30%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 45%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 5%.

Following step 027SHS111 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case where the group notice effect is not executed (step 027SHS115). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (D), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 60% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 10%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) determined in step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115 (step 027SHS116).

Following step 027SHS116, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS120). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (D), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect is executed if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, and executes if the fluctuation pattern is the super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execution Yes is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the button advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step 027SHS121). If it is determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS121; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS122. If it is not determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS121; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS125.

Following step 027SHS121 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of button advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS122). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (E), if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 90%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP". -C2 "is determined by 10%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 10% and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" at 90%.

Following step 027SHS122, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" or advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2") of the button advance notice effect determined in step 027SHS122 (step 027SHS123). ).

Following step 027SHS123, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case of executing the button notice effect (step 027SHS124). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (E), the effect control CPU 120 has 5% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 15%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 60%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 10%.

Following step 027SHS121 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case where the button advance notice effect is not executed (step 027SHS125). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (F), the effect control CPU 120 has 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 65% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 10%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 5%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) determined in step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125 (step 027SHS126).

Following step 027SHS126, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS130). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (F), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect is executed if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, and executes if the fluctuation pattern is the super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 75%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execution Yes is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131). If it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS133. If it is not determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS135.

Following step 027SHS131, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-D" of the accessory advance notice effect (step 027SHS133).

Following step 027SHS133, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) as a case of executing the character advance notice effect (step 027SHS134). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (G), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 5% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 15%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 60%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 10%.

Following step 027SHS131 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) as a case where the character advance notice effect is not executed (step). 027SHS135). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (H), the effect control CPU 120 has 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 74% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 4%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 2%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-D) determined in step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135 (step 027SHS136). Then, this flowchart ends.

11-16 to 11-20 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 027SH. Specifically, FIGS. 11-16 to 11-20 show the main scenes in the example shown in FIG. 11-12 (A) as an example, and FIG. 11-16 (A) → FIG. 11-16 (B) → FIG. 11-16 (C) → FIG. 11-17 (A) → FIG. 11-17 (B) → FIG. 11-17 (C) → FIG. 11-18 (A) → FIG. 11- 18 (B) → FIG. 11-18 (C) → FIG. 11-19 (A) → FIG. 11-19 (B) → FIG. 11-19 (C) → FIG. 11-20 (A) → FIG. 11-20 ( B) → Transition in the order of FIG. 11-20 (C).

FIG. 11-16 (A) is a scene of reaching in the variable display. FIG. 11-16 (B) is a scene developed into super reach (a scene of T1 in FIG. 11-11). FIG. 11-16 (C) is a scene at the beginning of the super reach effect (a scene immediately after T1 in FIG. 11-11).

11-17 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI suggesting whether the item image A is displayed is performed (FIGS. 11-11 and 11). The scene immediately before T2 of -12 (A)). That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether the item image A is displayed immediately before the display timing (T2) of the item image A. To do. The effect control CPU 120 also executes an item image display suggestion effect that suggests whether each item image is displayed immediately before the display timing of another item image such as the item image B.

In FIG. 11-17 (B), the execution of the item image effect A is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGALV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12). (A) T2 scene).

Regarding the relationship between the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI and the item image A that suggests whether the item image A is displayed, the item image A is displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. In some cases, the item image A may not be displayed. Further, when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed, the item image A may be displayed at all times. Further, the item image A may be displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. Further, the item image A may be displayed more easily when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed than when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI, and the ratio of whether item image A is displayed or not is displayed depending on which type of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. It may be different. Item image display suggestion display 027SHIGC-SHI and item image C suggesting whether item image B is displayed, relationship between item image B and item image B, item image display suggestion display 027SHIGC-SHI suggesting whether item image C is displayed The same applies to the relationship between the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGD-SHI and the item image D, which suggests whether the item image D is displayed.

FIG. 11-17 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image A changes is performed (FIGS. 11-11 and 11 and C). FIG. 11-12 (A), a scene immediately before T6). That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN to suggest whether the display mode of the item image A changes immediately before the change timing (T6) of the item image A. To execute. The effect control CPU 120 also executes an item image change suggestion effect that suggests whether the display mode of each item image changes immediately before the change timing of another item image such as the item image B.

FIG. 11-18 (A) is a scene (the scene of T6 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 (A)) in which the item image effect A is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

Regarding the relationship between the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN and the item image A, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes, when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed, the item image A There may be a case where the display mode changes and a case where the display mode of the item image A does not change. Further, when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed, the display mode of the item image A may be changed at any time. Further, the display mode of the item image A may be changed when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is not displayed. Further, the display mode of the item image A may be changed more easily when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed than when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is not displayed. Further, there are a plurality of types of the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, and whether or not the display mode of the item image A changes depending on which type of item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed. The proportions may be different. Item image change suggestion display 027SHIGC-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of item image B changes, the relationship between item image B and item image change suggestion display 027SHIGC-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of item image C changes The same applies to the relationship between the item image C and the item image C, and the relationship between the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGD-HEN and the item image D, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image D changes.

FIG. 11-18 (B) shows the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes, as in the scene of FIG. 11-17 (C). Is a scene (the scene immediately before T10 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 (A)). FIG. 11-18 (C) is a scene in which the item image effect A is changed to the third display mode (level 3) (the scene of T10 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 (A)).

FIG. 11-19 (A) shows that the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is executed (started). This is a scene in which the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 (A)). That is, the effect control CPU 120 displays the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the fanning effect that fuels whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 also indicates that each of the fanning effects is executed (started) immediately before the execution start timing of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute another notice effect such as the group notice effect. Display the start display of the fanning effect.

11-19 (B) to 11-20 (B) show a scene (FIG. 11SHIGA-AO) in which a fanning effect 027SHIGA-AO is performed to encourage whether to execute a cut-in notice effect which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A (FIG. 11-11 and T14 to T15 in FIG. 11-12 (A)). In the example of FIGS. 11-19 (B) to 11-20 (B), the countdown fanning display 027SHIGA-AO that counts down to the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect is performed. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 also executes a fanning effect that encourages whether to execute each advance notice effect immediately before the execution start timing of other advance notice effects such as the group advance notice effect.

FIG. 11-20 (C) shows a scene in which a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is performed, that is, a scene in which a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. (Scene of T15 to T16 of FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 (A)).

It should be noted that there are a fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI indicating that a fanning effect is executed to indicate whether to execute a cut-in notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, and a notice effect corresponding to the item image A. Regarding the relationship with the fanning effect that determines whether to execute the cut-in notice effect, even if the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed, the fanning effect may be executed or the fanning effect may not be executed. Good. Further, when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed, the fanning effect may always be executed. Further, the fanning effect may be executed when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. Further, it may be easier to execute the fanning effect when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed than when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI, and the ratio of whether or not to execute the fanning effect is different depending on which type of fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed. May be good. The fanning effect start display 027SHIGB-KAI indicating that the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image B, and the group notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image B The relationship with the fanning effect that fuels whether to execute, the button warning effect that corresponds to the item image C. The fanning effect start display 027SHIGC-KAI that indicates that the fanning effect that fuels whether to execute the notice effect is executed, and the item. The relationship with the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button advancement effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the image C, and the instigation effect that incites whether to execute the character advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D, is executed. The same applies to the relationship between the fanning effect start display 027SHIGD-KAI indicating that the item image D and the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the character advance notice effect which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.

In addition, regarding the relationship between the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, and the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, the fan effect was executed. In some cases, the cut-in notice effect may be executed and the cut-in notice effect may not be executed (see FIG. 11-12 (B)). Further, when the fanning effect is executed, the cut-in notice effect may be executed at any time. In addition, the cut-in notice effect may be executed when the fanning effect is not executed. In addition, it may be easier to execute the cut-in notice effect when the fanning effect is executed than when the fanning effect is not executed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of fanning effects, and the ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect may be different depending on which type of fanning effect is executed. The relationship between the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group advance notice effect that corresponds to the item image B and the group advance notice effect that corresponds to the item image B, and the advance notice effect that corresponds to the item image C. The relationship between the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button advance notice effect and the button advance notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C, and whether to execute the character advance notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D. The same applies to the relationship between the fanning effect and the character advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.

11-21 to 11-30 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 027SH. Specifically, FIGS. 11-21 to 11-30 show the main scenes in the example shown in FIG. 11-13 (A) as an example, and FIG. 11-21 (A) → FIG. 11-21 (B) → Fig. 11-21 (C) → Fig. 11-22 (A) → Fig. 11-22 (B) → Fig. 11-22 (C) → Fig. 11-23 (A) → Fig. 11- 23 (B)-> FIG. 11-23 (C)->, ..., FIG. 11-29 (A)-> FIG. 11-29 (B)-> FIG. 11-29 (C)-> FIG. 11-30 (A)-> FIG. The transition is in the order of -30 (B) → FIG. 11-30 (C).

FIG. 11-21 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI suggesting whether the item image A is displayed is being performed (in T2 of FIG. 11-11). The scene just before). FIG. 11-21 (B) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect A is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGALV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T2 in FIG. 11-11). Is.

FIG. 11-21 (C) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGB-SHI suggesting whether the item image B is displayed is being performed (FIG. 11-11, T3). The scene just before). FIG. 11-22 (A) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect B is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGBLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T3 in FIG. 11-11). Is.

FIG. 11-22 (B) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGC-SHI suggesting whether the item image C is displayed is being performed (FIG. 11-11, T4). The scene just before). FIG. 11-22 (C) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect C is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGCLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T4 in FIG. 11-11). Is.

FIG. 11-23 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGD-SHI suggesting whether the item image D is displayed is being performed (FIG. 11-11, T5). The scene just before). FIG. 11-23 (B) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect D is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGDLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T5 in FIG. 11-11). Is.

FIG. 11-23 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image A changes is performed (FIG. 11-11). The scene just before T6). FIG. 11-24 (A) is a scene (the scene of T6 in FIG. 11-11) in which the item image effect A is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 11-24 (B) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGB-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image B changes is performed (FIG. 11-11). The scene just before T7). FIG. 11-24 (C) is a scene (the scene of T7 in FIG. 11-11) in which the item image effect B is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 11-25 (A) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGC-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image C changes is performed (FIG. 11-11). The scene just before T8). FIG. 11-25 (B) is a scene (the scene of T8 in FIG. 11-11) in which the item image effect C is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 11-25 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGD-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image D changes is performed (FIG. 11-11). The scene just before T9). FIG. 11-26 (A) is a scene in which the item image effect D does not change (the scene of T9 in FIG. 11-11).

FIG. 11-26 (B) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGD-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image D changes is performed (FIG. 11-11). The scene just before T13). FIG. 11-26 (C) is a scene in which the item image effect D does not change (the scene of T13 in FIG. 11-11). The item image effect C is changed to the third display mode (level 3) in the scene before the scene of 9-26 (C) (the scene of T12 in FIG. 11-11).

FIG. 11-27 (A) shows that the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is executed (started). This is a scene in which the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (A)).

FIG. 11-27 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13) in which a fanning effect 027SHIGA-AO is performed to incite whether to execute a cut-in notice effect which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A. (A) scenes T14 to T15). FIG. 11-27 (C) shows a scene in which the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is performed, that is, a scene in which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. (Scene of T15 to T16 of FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (A)).

FIG. 11-28 (A) shows a fanning effect start display 027SHIGB indicating that a fanning effect is executed (started) to indicate whether to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B) which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image B. -KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T17 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (A)).

11-28 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) A) scenes T17 to T18). 11-28 (C) shows a scene in which a group notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image B, is performed, that is, a scene in which the group image 027SHYKE-GN is displayed (FIGS. 11-11 and 11). -13 (A), scenes T18 to T19).

FIG. 11-29 (A) shows that the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2), which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image C, is executed (started). This is a scene in which the effect start display 027SHIGC-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T20 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (A)).

11-29 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) and 11-13 (FIG. 11-11) A) scenes from T20 to T21). 11-29 (C) to 11-30 (A) show a scene in which the button notice effect (YEP-C1), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image C, is performed, that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU. It is a scene (the scenes of T21 to T22 of FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (A)) which are displayed and a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed as an example after the operation of the push button 31B.

FIG. 11-30 (B) shows a fanning effect start display indicating that a fanning effect is executed (started), which indicates whether to execute the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image D. It is a scene displaying 027SHIGD-KAI (a scene immediately before T23 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (A)).

FIG. 11-30 (C) shows a scene (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13) in which a fanning effect 027SHIGD-AO is performed to incite whether or not to execute a character advance notice effect which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image D. (A) scenes T23 to T24). It should be noted that, after the fanning effect, the character advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D, is not performed (see FIG. 11-13 (A)).

In the examples of FIGS. 11-16 to 11-30, each item image display suggestion display (027SHIGA-SHI, 027SHIGB-SHI, 027SHIGC-SHI, 027SHIGD-SHI) suggesting the display of each item image is common. However, it may be different for each item image. In addition, although each of the fanning effects (027SHIGA-AO, 027SHIGB-AO, 027SHIGC-AO, 027SHIGD-AO) that fuels each notice production is common, it is different for each notice effect (that is, for each item image). May be good. The fanning effect start display (027SHIGA-KAI, 027SHIGB-KAI, 027SHIGC-KAI, 027SHIGD-KAI) indicating the start of each fanning effect corresponding to each notice effect is common, but any of the noticed effect is displayed. It may be different depending on whether it starts (that is, for each item image).

(Suggested setting value)
Subsequently, the suggestion of the set value (see FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH suggests a set value currently set by using the item image effect (for example, using the item image). For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 (A) and 11-31 (B), the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has a fourth display mode as the display mode of the item image D in the item image effect D (B). The display mode of level 4) may be provided to suggest the currently set value in relation to the display of the item image D of the fourth display mode.

(First example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (C), there is a transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present). It may be suggested that the currently set value is set high (for example, the set value is 4 or more).

(Second example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (D), it is currently set when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed → off. It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Third example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (E), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not performed (the movable body 027SH32 is not operated). (Any result of hit or miss), it may be suggested that the currently set value is set high (for example, set value 4 or more).

(Fourth example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (F), it is currently set when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed → is out of order. It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Fifth example)
Further, although not shown, it is currently set when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode is changed to off (regardless of whether or not the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed). It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).
(Display timing of the fourth display mode (level 4))

In the first example (the same may apply to each of the second to fourth examples), the display timing of the item image D in the fourth display mode is not particularly limited (that is, it is displayed from the beginning). It may be displayed differently from other display modes), but as an example, the display period may be lengthened so as to be easily recognized by the player. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (A) as the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6", the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed from the first (T5 in FIG. 11-11). You may. In addition, in FIG. 11-32 (A), the fourth display mode is generally colored in gold to make the player recognize that the hit is confirmed or rich, but the item image D in the fourth display mode is disengaged after the display. When the possibility of becoming non-zero (for example, in the case of the second example or the like), the fourth display mode may be a color or pattern different from gold.

(An example of the determination ratio of the first example)
In the case of the first example, as the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) in the case of executing the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), FIG. 11-10 ( Instead of the determination ratio shown in G), the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-32 (B) is used, and the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed is used. ), As the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern, the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-32 (C) may be used instead of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-10 (H). That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step 027SHS134 of FIG. 11-15, the item image effect execution mode pattern is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), and the step of FIG. 11-15. In 027SHS135, the item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 11-32 (C).

That is, there is no case where the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not performed (see FIG. 11-32 (C)), but the item image in the fourth display mode. Display of D → Execution of character advance notice effect (YEP-D) Yes (with operation of movable body 027SH32) may change (see FIG. 11-32 (B)), and item image of the fourth display mode. There is a setting difference in the transition from the display of D to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (see FIG. 11-32 (B)). In the example shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is determined at a rate of 1% when the current set value is any of the set values 1 to 3. If the current set value is any of the set values 4 to 6, it is determined at a rate of 15%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), it is the case of the set value 1-3 that the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. There are more cases where the set value is 4-6 than. That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), the fourth setting is higher (for example, the set value is 4 or more) than the low setting (for example, the set value is 3 or less). The frequency of transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) increases. Therefore, the transition (or frequent transition) of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is high with respect to the currently set value. It suggests that it is a setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-32 (B), even if the super reach A (variation pattern # 13, # 17) is obtained, the super reach B (variation pattern # 14, # 18) is obtained. Even if there is, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" can be determined when the character effect is executed (in the case of any of the set values 1 to 3, it is determined at a rate of 1%. (Although it is determined at a rate of 15% when any of the set values 4 to 6), the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is performed only when the character effect is executed in the case of Super Reach B. (The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" may not be determined when the character effect is executed in the case of Super Reach A). That is, in the case of Super Reach B, there is a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (the operation of the movable body 027SH32 is present). On the other hand, in the case of Super Reach A, the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed (the movable body 027SH32 is operated). May be set so that there is no difference in settings.

(An example of the determination ratio of the second example)
In the case of the second example, for example, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present) → the jackpot. There is no setting difference in, but there is a setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (with the operation of the movable body 027SH32) → off. There may be. For example, the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed in the case of a super reach jackpot is set to be common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 20%), while the super reach is lost. In this case, the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the accessory effect is executed may be different between the case of the set value 1 to 3 and the case of the set value 4 to 6 (for example). If it is any of the set values 1 to 3, it may be 1%, and if it is any of the set values 4 to 6, it may be 10%).

In the case of Super Reach B, the item image D in the 4th display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed (the movable body 027SH32 is operated) → the transition is made. While making the setting difference, in the case of Super Reach A, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is possible (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present) → is off. There may be no setting difference in the transition of ,.

(An example of the determination ratio of the third example)
In the case of the third example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), but the fourth example. There may be a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the non-execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). For example, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed is set to be common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 10%), while the item image effect is not executed when the character effect is not executed. The determination ratio of the execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" may be different between the case of the set values 1 to 3 and the case of the set values 4 to 6 (for example, when any of the set values 1 to 3 is set, 0. If it is 5% or any of the set values 4 to 6, it may be 3%).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fourth example)
In the case of the fourth example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) → big hit. There may be a setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) → off. For example, the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is not executed in the super reach jackpot (variation patterns # 17 and # 18) is set to be common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 5%). , When the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is determined when the character effect is not executed in the out-of-super reach (variation patterns # 13 and # 14), when the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 4 to 6 are set. (For example, 0.5% may be set when any of the set values 1 to 3 is set, and 3% may be set when any of the set values 4 to 6 is used).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fifth example)
In the case of the fifth example, the details are omitted, but for example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the jackpot, but the item image in the fourth display mode. There may be a setting difference in the transition of D display → off.

In the above, an example suggesting that the currently set value is set to a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more) has been described, but the target of the suggestion is not limited to the high setting. For example, the negation of the minimum setting (setting value 1) (setting value 2 or more) may be suggested, or each setting value of setting value 1 to setting value 6 may be suggested. That is, in the above, an example in which the determination ratios of the item image effect execution mode patterns are divided into two, the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 4 to 6, has been described. For example, the set value 1 and the set value 2 have been described. The item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined differently by dividing into 6 and the item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined by dividing each of the set values 1 to 6 into 6 items. May be different.

(Regarding a modified example of the game machine related to the feature unit 027SH)
Subsequently, a modification of FIGS. 11-1 to 11-32 will be described.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example has been described in which the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image match. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, the display start timing of the item images A to D is the display start timing of the item image A (T2) → the display start timing of the item image B (T3) → the item image. The display start timing of C (T4) → the display start timing of item image D (T5), and the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to item images A to D is the cut-in corresponding to item image A. Execution start timing of the notice effect (T15) → Execution start timing of the group notice effect corresponding to the item image B (T18) → Execution start timing of the button notice effect corresponding to the item image C (T21) → Correspond to the item image D The order is the execution start timing (T24) of the character advance notice effect, and the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image match. ing. However, the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image do not have to match. For example, the item image A → the item image B may be displayed in this order, and the group notice effect corresponding to the item image B → the cut-in notice effect corresponding to the item image A may be executed in this order. Further, when the item image A → the item image B are displayed in this order, the cut-in notice effect → the group notice effect may be executed in the order, or the group notice effect → the cut-in notice effect may be executed in the order. You may do so.

(Modification example 2 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the display start timing of each item image is different is described. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, the item image A is T1, the item image B is T2, the item image C is T3, and the item image D is T4. However, the display start timing of each item image does not have to be different individually. For example, two types of display start timings of the four types of item images A to D may be displayed at the same time, or three types of the four types of item images may be displayed at the same time. Alternatively, the display start timings of all the four types of item images may be simultaneous.

(Modification example 3 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the change timing of each item image to the second display mode (level 2) is different is described. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, the item image A is T6, the item image B is T7, the item image C is T8, and the item image D is T9. However, the timing of changing each item image to the second display mode (level 2) does not have to be different individually. For example, the timing of changing to the second display mode (level 2) of two types of the four types of item images A to D may be simultaneous, or three types of the four types of item images. The timing of changing to the second display mode (level 2) may be the same, or the timing of changing all four types of item images to the second display mode (level 2) may be simultaneous. The same applies to the timing of change to the third display mode (level 3).

(Modification example 4 of feature portion 027SH)
In the example shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image A is always the first display mode (level 1), but the display mode at the start of display is the second display mode (level). 2) or the third display mode (level 3) may be used. The same applies to the item image B, the item image C, and the item image D. As described above, when the item image D may be in the fourth display mode (level 4), the display mode at the start of display may be the fourth display mode (level 4).

(Variation example 5 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the display mode of the item image does not change at the timing after any of the notice effects is executed (that is, at the change timing when the display mode of the item image changes, any of the notice effects is executed An example) that is earlier than the above was explained. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-11, none of the item images changes at the timing after the earliest executed cut-in notice effect is executed (after T15). However, the display mode of the item image may be changed at the timing after any of the advance notice effects is executed.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the item image is not newly displayed at the timing after one of the notice effects is executed (that is, the display start timing of the item image is earlier than the timing when any of the notice effects is executed. Example) was explained. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-11, no item image is newly displayed at the timing after the earliest executed cut-in notice effect is executed (after T15). However, the item image may be newly displayed at the timing after any of the advance notice effects is executed.

(Modification example 7 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect do not overlap has been described, but the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect may overlap. That is, when the execution start timing of a certain advance notice effect → the execution start timing of another advance notice effect → the execution end timing of another advance notice effect → the execution end timing of a certain advance notice effect, or the execution start timing of a certain advance notice effect → another The execution start timing of the notice effect → the execution end timing of a certain notice effect → the execution end timing of another notice effect may be set.

(Modification example 8 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image and the notice production are one-to-one, such as the item image A and the cut-in notice effect, the item image B and the group notice effect, the item image C and the button notice effect, and the item image D and the character notice effect. An example of correspondence was explained. That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-11, it is the cut-in notice effect that can be executed based on the item image A being deleted (used as an item), and the item image B is deleted. It is a group notice effect that can be executed based on, and it is a button notice effect that can be executed based on the item image C being deleted, and it can be executed based on the item image D being deleted. Explained that it was a character notice production. However, the item image and the advance notice effect do not necessarily have to have a one-to-one correspondence.

For example, a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) may be associated with a certain item image (for example, item image X). When the item image X is associated with the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect, only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, and the item image X is executed. In some cases, only the group notice effect is executed based on the fact that is deleted. The cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect may be executed based on the deletion of the item image X.

Further, for example, one notice effect (for example, cut-in notice effect) may be associated with a plurality of item images (for example, item image X and item image Y). When the cut-in notice effect is associated with the item image X and the item image Y, the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, and the item image Y is deleted. The cut-in notice effect may be executed based on the fact. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is erased, the rate at which the advance notice effect is executed may be different depending on the type of the item image to be erased. In the above example, in addition to the display mode of the item image X and the item image Y when deleted, the cut-in notice effect is executed according to whether the item image X is deleted or the item image Y is deleted. You may make different proportions.

Further, for example, a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) may be associated with a plurality of item images (for example, item image X and item image Y). When the item image X and the item image Y are associated with the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect, only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X. , When only the group notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, when only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image Y, and when the item image Y is executed. In some cases, only the group notice effect is executed based on the fact that it is erased. In addition, when the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed based on the erasure of the item image X, or the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed based on the erasure of the item image Y. It may be executed. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is erased, the ratio of the advance notice effect to be executed and the ratio of the type of the advance notice effect to be executed may be different depending on the type of the item image to be deleted. Good.

(Modification example 9 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above description, the item image can specify the notice effect having a corresponding relationship at the time of the start of display, but the item image may not be able to specify the notice effect having a corresponding relationship at the time of the start of display. For example, the item image A corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is displayed in a display mode (for example, plain) in which the corresponding notice effect cannot be specified at the display start timing, and the corresponding notice effect is displayed at the change timing. May be changed from an unspecified display mode (for example, plain) to a identifiable display mode (first display mode, second display mode, etc.) for the corresponding advance notice effect.

(Modification example 10 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which a plurality of item images of the same type are not displayed has been described, but a plurality of item images of the same type may be displayed. For example, when two item images A of the first display mode (level 1) are displayed side by side, or the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) and the item image A of the second display mode (level 2) are displayed side by side. And may be displayed side by side. When N items of a certain type are displayed, the advance notice effect corresponding to the item images is executed up to N times.

(Modification example 11 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the display mode of the item image changes, but the type of the item image does not change. However, the type of the item image may also change. For example, when the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) changes to the item image B of the first display mode (level 1), or the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is the second. There may be a case where the item image B of the display mode (level 2) is changed. The display mode is demoted (level 3 → level 2) when the type changes such that the item image A of the third display mode (level 3) changes to the item image B of the second display mode (level 2). There may be cases.

(Modification example 12 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, there are four types of notice effects, and there are also four types of item images corresponding to the notice effects, but the item images and the notice effects do not have to be four types. For example, in relation to the above-described modification 8, the item image may be 2 types and the notice effect may be 5 types, the item image may be 5 types, and the notice effect may be 2 types. In addition, one type of item image and one type of notice effect may be used.

(Modification example 13 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example has been described in which the timing of erasing the item image is the timing of executing the fanning effect for inciting the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image, but the timing of erasing the item image is not limited to this. For example, the timing for erasing the item image may be the timing at which the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed. That is, the item image may be continuously displayed during the execution period of the fanning effect and deleted at the start of execution of the advance notice effect (at the end of the fanning effect). Specifically, in FIGS. 11-11, the item image A is erased to T15 instead of T14, the item image B is erased to T18 instead of T17, and the item image C is erased to T21 instead of T20. The item image D may be deleted in T24 instead of T23.

(Modification example 14 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image A is erased at the start of the fanning effect (T14 in FIG. 11-11), and during the execution period of the fanning effect (T14 to T15 in FIG. 11-11) and during the cut-in notice effect (T14 in FIG. 11-11). An example that is not displayed in T15 to T16 of FIGS. 11-11 (in the case of the above-described modified example 13, it is erased at the start of the cut-in notice effect (T15), and is erased during the period of the cut-in notice effect (FIG. 11-11). An example) that is not displayed in T15 to T16) has been described. That is, an example has been described in which the item image A is erased by the start of the cut-in notice effect at the latest and is not displayed during the cut-in notice effect. However, the item image A may be displayed during the cut-in notice effect without being erased. That is, the item image A may not be erased even if it is used. The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

(Variation example 15 of the feature portion 027SH)
In relation to the above-described modification 14, when the used item image A is not erased, it may be possible to recognize that the used item image A has been used. For example, if the display mode of the item image A immediately before starting the fanning effect for fanning the cut-in notice effect is the second display mode (level 2) (first display mode (level 1) or third display mode (level 1)). 3)), at the start of the fanning effect that fuels the cut-in notice effect, the second display mode (level 2) → the fanning effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording "fanning effect is in progress". , Etc.), and at the start of the cut-in notice effect, the fanning effect execution mode → the notice effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording “notice effect in progress” etc. is displayed). , At the end of the cut-in advance notice effect, the advance notice effect execution mode → the advance notice effect end mode (for example, the color may be grayed down or monochrome, and the word “finished” or the like may be displayed). That is, regarding the item image A, during the execution period (T14 to T15) of the fanning effect, it is set as the "fanning effect execution mode", and during the execution period of the cut-in notice effect (T15 to T16), it is set as the "notice effect execution mode" and cut. After the end of the in-notice effect (T16 ~), the "notice effect end mode" may be set. The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

If the cut-in notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect, at the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect, the fanning effect execution mode → the notice effect non-execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording "notice" A mode in which "directing non-execution" or the like is displayed) may be used. That is, with respect to the item image A, the "fanning effect execution mode" may be set during the execution period (T14 to T15) of the fanning effect, and the "notice effect non-execution mode" may be set after the end of the fanning effect (T15 to). The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

The above-mentioned fanning effect execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image. For example, it may be plain, and the wording "in the process of fanning" or the like may be displayed. The advance notice effect execution mode, the advance notice effect end mode, and the advance notice effect non-execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image.

In addition, instead of the above, the fanning effect execution mode may be one according to the type of the item image. For example, the colors may be grayed down or the wording "in the process of fanning" or the like may be displayed within a range in which a pattern (see FIG. 11-9) corresponding to the type of the item image can be recognized. The advance notice effect execution mode, the advance notice effect end mode, and the advance notice effect non-execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image.

(Modification example 16 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example of executing the notice effect after executing the fan effect (an example of executing the fan effect before executing the notice effect) has been described, but it is not necessary to execute the notice effect after executing the fan effect (notice effect). You don't have to perform the fanning effect before executing). That is, after the item image is used, the advance notice effect may be executed without executing the fanning effect.

(Modification example 17 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image effect (display of the item image) and the notice effect are executed during the super reach effect, but the item image effect and the advance notice effect may be executed during another period. For example, the flow may be variable display start → item image A display start → reach → item image A deletion → cut-in notice effect execution, or variable display start → item image A display start → reach → super reach. → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect, or start variable display → Reach → Start display item image A → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect, The flow may be as follows: variable display start → reach → display start of item image A → development into super reach → deletion of item image A → execution of cut-in notice effect.

(Modification example 18 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image effect (display of the item image) and the notice effect are executed during one variation, but the item image effect and the advance notice effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

For example, it is necessary to display all the necessary item images (item images for which display is determined) in one fluctuation, and delete all the displayed item images in the other fluctuation after the next fluctuation. It is also possible to execute all the notice effects (notice effects for which execution is decided). For example, the item image A, the item image B, and the item image C are displayed on the first change → the item image A, during the change after some changes (for example, during any change from the second change to the fourth change). The flow is that the item image B and the item image C are all erased (each item image can be changed between the start of display and the deletion) and the necessary advance notice effect is executed.

Further, for example, all necessary item images (item images for which display presence is determined) are displayed during a certain fluctuation, and the displayed item images are sequentially deleted over a plurality of fluctuations to produce a necessary notice (a notice effect). The advance notice effect for which execution is determined) may be sequentially executed. For example, it is necessary to start displaying the item image A, the item image B, and the item image C in the first variation and delete the item image A in the first variation (the item image A can be changed between the start of display and the deletion). Execute notice effect (cut-in notice effect) → Erase item image B at the second change (item image B can change between display start and erase) and execute necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → 3 changes The flow of erasing the item image C in the eyes (the item image C can be changed between the start of display and erasing) and executing the necessary notice effect (button notice effect), and the item image A and item image B in the first variation. , Start displaying item image C → Erase item image A on the 2nd change (item image A can change between display start and erase) and execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) → 3rd change Erase item image B (item image B can be changed between display start and erase) and execute necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → Delete item image C at the 4th change (item image C starts display ~ It is a flow of executing the necessary advance notice effect (button advance notice effect) (changeable during erasure).

Further, for example, the required item image (item image for which display presence is determined) is sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the displayed item is displayed during another fluctuation in which all the necessary item images have been displayed. You may delete all the images and execute all the necessary notice effects (notice effects for which execution is determined). For example, the item image A starts to be displayed on the first variation → the item image B starts to be displayed on the second variation → the item image C starts to be displayed on the third variation, and the item image A, the item image B, and the item appear on the third variation. The flow of erasing all image C (each item image can be changed between display start and erasure) and executing the necessary notice effect, or the item image A is displayed on the first change → the item image on the second change. Start displaying B → Start displaying item image C on the 3rd change → Erase all item image A, item image B, and item image C on the 4th change (each item image can be changed between display start and deletion) The flow is to execute the necessary notice production.

Further, for example, necessary item images (item images for which display presence is determined) are sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the displayed item images are sequentially deleted over a plurality of fluctuations to provide a necessary notice. The production (notice production for which execution is determined) may be sequentially executed. For example, the item image A is displayed on the first variation → the item image B is displayed on the second variation, and the item image A is deleted on the second variation (the item image A can be changed between the display start and the deletion). The necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) is executed, and the item image B is erased at the third variation (the item image B can be changed between the start of display and the deletion), and the necessary notice effect (group notice effect) is performed. The flow of execution, for example, the item image A starts to be displayed on the first variation → the item image B starts to be displayed on the second variation → the item image A is deleted on the third variation (the item image A is between the display start and the deletion). Perform the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) (changeable) and delete the item image B at the 4th variation (item image B can be changed between display start and erase) and the necessary notice effect (group) It is a flow to execute the notice production).

(Modified example 19 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 9 and 11-14), but the item image is determined in the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). May be good. In the mode of determining the item image in the variable display start setting process (step S171), the item image is determined based on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 11-10), but the look-ahead advance notice is given. When the item image is determined in the setting process (step S161), the received symbol specification command (whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, sudden probability) are determined. The item image may be determined based on the contents of the effect control command (showing effect control command) and the variation category specification command (effect control command indicating the determined variation pattern category (type)). It should be noted that a plurality of item images may be collectively determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one item image may be determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of each start winning. .. That is, a plurality of item images may be associated with one variation, or one item image may be associated with each variation.

(Modification example 20 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, as an effect when the item image is used after the item image is displayed, an example of executing a notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used has been described. However, the notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used has been described. There may be a case where a different kind of advance notice effect is executed. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-11, the cut-in notice effect can be executed based on the erasure of the item image A, but the group notice effect is based on the erasure of the item image A. May be executed. Further, as an example related to the modification 8, when a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) are associated with a certain item image (for example, item image X). , A notice effect (for example, a character advance notice effect) different from the above-mentioned plurality of advance notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) may be executed based on the deletion of the item image X. You may. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. In addition, in a mode in which a notice effect different from the notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used may be executed, a notice effect different from the notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used is executed. The jackpot expectation may be higher in the case than in the case of executing the advance notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used.

(Modification example 21 of the feature portion 027SH)
Although the suggestion of the set value has been described with reference to FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, the suggestion of the set value is not limited to this.

For example, in relation to the above-mentioned modification 1, the determination ratio of whether or not to match the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image is set. A setting difference may be provided to suggest a set value in relation to whether the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect match. As an example, the ratio of matching the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect is set to 95% when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), and is set to high (for example, 4). If it is (or more), it is set to 85%, and the high setting (for example, the setting value) is that the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect do not match (or often do not match). It may be suggested that it is 4 or more). In other words, the frequency of breaking the above-mentioned order-related rules (in principle, the order is the same) is higher in the high setting (5% in the low setting, 15% in the high setting). It may be suggested.

Further, in relation to the above-described modification 2, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the display start timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous, and it is related to whether the display start timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous. However, the set value may be suggested. As an example, the ratio of displaying start timings of a plurality of item images at the same time is set to 5% when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less) and 15% when the setting is high (for example, 4 or more). , It may be suggested that the fact that the change timings of the plurality of item images match (or the frequency of matching is high) is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more). In other words, the frequency of breaking the above display start timing rule (the principle is not simultaneous) is higher in the high setting (5% in the low setting, 15% in the high setting), so it is higher due to the breaking of the law (frequency of breaking the rule). It may suggest a setting. Similarly, in relation to the above-mentioned modification 3, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the change timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous, and whether the change timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous. It may be related and suggest a setting value.

Further, in relation to the above-described modification 4, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of the display mode at the start of displaying the item image, and the set value is suggested in relation to the display mode at the start of displaying the item image. May be good. As an example, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the first display mode (level 1) or the second display mode (level 2), and the ratio of the second display mode (level 2) is set low (for example,). If it is 3 or less), it is set to 3%, if it is set to a high setting (for example, 4 or more), it is set to 9%, and the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the second display mode (level 2). It may be suggested that (or the frequency of the second display mode (level 2) is high) is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more). In other words, the frequency at which the law regarding the display mode at the start of displaying the item image (in principle, the first display mode (level 1)) is broken is higher in the high setting (3% in the low setting, 9% in the high setting). High setting may be suggested by breaking the law (frequency of breaking the law).

Further, the set value may be suggested in the advance notice effect. For example, regarding a strong cut-in image (Fig. 11-5 (B), etc.), a normal strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, B, etc.) and a special strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the types of the strong cut-in images, the set value may be suggested in the strong cut-in image. Specifically, for example, after deciding to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) for displaying the strong cut-in image, if the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), "normal strong cut-in image" Is determined at a rate of 95% and "special strong cut-in image" is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the setting is high (for example, 4 or more), "normal strong cut-in image" is determined at 80% and "special". The "strong cut-in image" may be determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) for displaying the strong cut-in image, the frequency at which the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed (or the frequency at which the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed is displayed. It may be suggested that a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more) is high.

Further, for example, for a group image (FIG. 11-5 (C), etc.), two types of group images, a normal group image (group of character A) and a special group image (group of character B), are prepared, and the group image is prepared. By providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of, the set value may be suggested in the group image. Specifically, for example, after deciding to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B), when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), 95% of the "normal group image" and the "special group image" are used. Is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the setting is high (for example, 4 or more), even if the "normal group image" is determined at a rate of 80% and the "special group image" is determined at a rate of 20%. Good. That is, in the group notice effect (YEP-B) for displaying the group image, it is set high that the "special group image" is displayed (or the "special group image" is frequently displayed). (For example, it may be suggested that the set value is 4 or more).

In addition, the set value may be suggested in the super reach. For example, for Super Reach B (variable patterns # 16 and # 18), there are two types of super reach effects: a normal super reach effect (battle effect in background 1) and a special super reach effect (battle effect in background 2). By preparing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of super reach effect of super reach B, the set value may be suggested in the super reach effect of super reach B. In addition, it may be related to the jackpot and suggest a set value. For example, for the start effect (fanfare effect) of the big hit game state of the third big hit (see Fig. 11-2), two types of fanfare effects, a normal fanfare effect and a special fanfare effect, are prepared, and the fanfare effect in the third big hit is prepared. By providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of, the set value may be suggested in the fanfare effect in the third big hit.

Further, it may be suggested by the item image that the setting value is suggested later. For example, the item image may suggest that the set value is suggested in the advance notice effect. As an example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which a setting value is suggested, and a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect. The item image A in a mode suggesting that the above is performed (for example, a mode in which the wording “notice with setting suggestion?” Is displayed) may be displayed. That is, in the item image A of the above aspect, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect is performed, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, the "special strong cut-in image" is used in the cut-in notice effect. Is suggested to be displayed. As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, the mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, the item image A may be displayed (a mode in which the wording "notice with setting suggestion!" Is displayed). That is, the item image A of the above aspect suggests that the cut-in notice effect is performed and that the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

It should be noted that the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 11-4 has a set value in a different effect (may be an effect related to the jackpot reliability, or may be an effect not related to the jackpot reliability). The item image may suggest that the suggestion is made.

Further, it may be suggested by a method other than the item image that the setting value is suggested later. In other words, the item image may not suggest that the setting value is suggested later. For example, it may be suggested that the setting value is suggested in the advance notice effect by the fanning effect of the advance notice effect. As an example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which a setting value is suggested, and a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect. (For example, a mode in which a word such as "notice with setting suggestion?" Is displayed in the vicinity of the number to be counted down) may be executed. That is, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect will be performed in the fanning effect of the above aspect, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, the "special strong cut-in image" in the cut-in notice effect. It is suggested to display. As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, the mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, a fanning effect of (a mode in which a word such as "notice with setting suggestion!" Is displayed near the number to be counted down) may be executed. That is, the fanning effect of the above aspect suggests that the cut-in notice effect is performed and that the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

It should be noted that the suggestion of the set value may not be suggested at all later. That is, the set value may be suggested without any suggestion in advance (without suggesting even the item image or suggesting other than the item image.

In addition, "suggestion of setting value" is only to recognize that there is a high possibility that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range), and that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range). It may not be deterministically notified, or it may be deterministically notified that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). For example, by making sure that a certain effect or a certain display is not determined when the setting is low (for example, a setting value of 3 or less), the effect or the display or the like is set to a high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or less). It will definitely notify you of the fact.

(Application to other devices)
Although the example of applying to a pachinko gaming machine has been described above, it can also be applied to a slot machine. For example, in a certain state (for example, a state that is not an advantageous state), whether to shift to another state (for example, an advantageous state) periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range) is determined from the normal time. In a slot machine that draws with a high probability, it is possible to execute multiple types of advance notice effects with different expectations for transition to another state during the period of high probability that it visits periodically, and from the period of high probability. In the previous period, after making it possible to display an item image that can specify the type of advance notice effect to be executed, the type specified by the item image after the item image is displayed depending on the display mode of the item image. The rate at which the advance notice effect is executed may be different.

Alternatively, in the slot machine that draws with high probability whether to shift to the second advantageous state (for example, AT state, ART state, etc.) in the first advantageous state (for example, CZ, bonus game, etc.), the first In the second period of the advantageous state (for example, the period from the latter half to the final stage of the period of the first advantageous state), it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects having different expectations for transition to the second advantageous state. In the first period prior to the second period of the first advantageous state, it is possible to display an item image that can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed, and then the item image is displayed according to the display mode. After the item image is displayed, the rate at which the advance notice effect of the type specified by the item image is executed may be different.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 027SH)
(Means 1 relating to feature unit 027SH)
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.), comprising an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing an effect, the effect executing means , Multiple types of notices within a predetermined period (for example, T15 to T16, T18 to T19, T21 to T22, T24 to T25 shown in FIGS. 11-11, a period before the period in which the lottery is performed with high probability, etc.) A specific display (for example, FIGS. 11-9 (A) to 11-9 (A)), which can execute the effect (for example, a plurality of types of advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 11-4) and can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, the item image effect shown in FIG. 11-8 (A)) for displaying the plurality of types of item images shown in (L) before the predetermined period. The rate at which the content advantageous to the player is notified differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect executed within the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) to (F), the jackpot expectation degree is different. (Different), there are cases where the advance notice effect of the type specified by the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed, and cases where it is not executed (for example, FIGS. 11-10 (A) (C)). (E) When the item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" for displaying the item image are determined when the advance notice effect of (G) is executed, the item image is specified by the item image after the item image is displayed. Item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" that display an item image when the advance notice effects of the above types are executed and the advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 11-10 (B), (D), (F), and (H) are not executed. When the item image is displayed, the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is not executed), and there are a plurality of display modes of the specific display (for example, FIGS. 11-9 (A) to (A) to ( (L)), the rate at which the notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, FIGS. 11-8 (B) and 11). As shown in -10 (A) to -10 (H), the rate at which the notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed after the item image is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the item image. Specifically, the notice. As for the rate at which the effect is executed, the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the third display mode (level 3)> the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the second display state. (Level 2)> The display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the game machine, the ratio of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, the player pays attention to the display mode of the specific display. The interest of the game is improved.

(Means 2 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
In the game machine of the above means 1, the specific display changes to a special mode corresponding to the execution period of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the type of advance notice effect specified by the specific display). It is possible (for example, the item image A can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of executing the cut-in notice effect (T15)), and the special aspect of the specific display is not limited to the type of the specific display. (For example, it may be common regardless of the type of item image).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is being executed (the item image is used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify which specific display corresponds to the advance notice effect being executed and which specific display corresponds to the advance notice effect being executed.

(Means 3 for Feature 027SH)
In the gaming machines of means 1 and means 2, the specific display can be changed to a special mode after the execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). (For example, the item image A may be changed to the "notice effect end mode" at the end of execution (T16) of the cut-in notice effect, etc.).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display has been executed (the item image has been used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify which specific display corresponds to the executed notice effect and which specific display corresponds to the executed advance notice effect.

(Means 4 for Feature 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the means 1 to means 3, a plurality of types of the specific display can be displayed as the specific effect within the specific period prior to the predetermined period (for example, T2 to T2 shown in FIGS. 11-11). A maximum of four types of item images can be displayed in T14, etc.), and the specific display of each type may be displayed in any of the display modes (for example, in the scene of FIGS. 11-26 (C), the item image). A is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), item image B is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), item image C is displayed in the third display mode (level 3), and item image D is displayed. It is displayed according to the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since attention is paid to the display mode of each type of specific display, the interest is improved.

(Means 5 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 2 can execute the advance notice effect at a plurality of timings within the predetermined period (for example, T15, T18, T21, T24 as shown in FIGS. 11-11). In addition, the advance notice effect can be executed at a plurality of execution start timings), and the execution timing of the advance notice effect differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11, the cut-in advance notice effect). The execution start timing of the group notice effect is T15, the execution start timing of the group notice effect is T18, the execution start timing of the button notice effect is T21, the execution start timing of the character advance notice effect is T24, etc., depending on the type of the notice effect). The timing at which the specific display becomes the special mode differs depending on the type of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect specified by the specific display) (for example, the item image A is a cut-in notice effect). The item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of execution (T15), the item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of execution (T18), and the item image C is a button notice. Since the item image D can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of executing the effect (T21) and can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of executing the character advance notice effect (T24), the item The timing at which the image becomes the "notice effect execution mode" may differ depending on the type of the advance notice effect specified by the item image).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since the execution timing of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is different, the complexity of the effect can be reduced.

(Means 6 for Feature 027SH)
In the game machines of the above means 1 to 5, the notice is displayed when the specific display capable of specifying the type of the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, and before the execution of the notice effect. There are cases where the specific display that can specify the type of effect is not displayed (for example, in the example of FIG. 11-13 (B), the item image B corresponding to the button advance effect is displayed before the button advance effect is executed. However, the item image D corresponding to the character advance notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the character advance notice effect), and the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect. The rate at which the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect is different from that in the case where the content advantageous to the player is notified, for example, FIG. 11-8 (Fig. 11-8). B), as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) to 11-10 (H), when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, and before the advance notice effect is executed, the notice effect is displayed. Since the execution ratio of the advance notice effect is different from when the corresponding item image is not displayed, the advance notice effect is displayed when the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and before the advance notice effect is executed. When the item image corresponding to is not displayed, the jackpot expectation may be different as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) to 11-7 (F)).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the interest is improved because attention is paid to what kind of production flow will be.

(Means 7 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 6 can change the display mode of the specific display after the display of the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 11-8), and an effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display. (For example, the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (C)) can be executed. You may.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since attention is paid to whether the specific display changes, the interest is improved.

(Means 8 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 7 can execute variable display of the identification information, and the look-ahead determination means (for example, the look-ahead by the effect control CPU 120) determines whether or not the content advantageous to the player is notified. The advance notice setting process (step S161) and the like) are provided, the predetermined period is a period corresponding to a plurality of variable displays, and the specific display may be displayed based on the look-ahead determination. For example, a plurality of item images may be associated with one variable display, or one item image may be associated with each variable display.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the degree of attention to the fluctuation executed later is increased, and the interest is improved.

(Means 9 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 8 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-2 (B)), and the set value is suggested in at least a part of the advance notice effects of the plurality of types. You may. For example, regarding a strong cut-in image (Fig. 11-5 (B), etc.), a normal strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, B, etc.) and a special strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the types of the strong cut-in images, the set value may be suggested in the strong cut-in image.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, in addition to paying attention to whether the advance notice effect is executed after the display of the specific display, whether or not there is a suggestion of the set value in the advance notice effect displayed after the display of the specific display, the interest is improved. ..

(Means 10 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , May be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, attention is paid to the specific display regarding the suggestion of the set value, so that the interest is further improved. If there is no relationship between the item image effect that displays the item image corresponding to the notice effect before the execution of the notice effect and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above-mentioned game machine, the item image effect may suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect, and since there is a relationship between the item image effect and the setting suggestion effect, the interest is improved.

(Means 11 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , It may be displayed in response to the advance notice effect to be executed, but may not be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest. If the item image effect that displays the item image corresponding to the notice effect before the execution of the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value are related, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be reduced. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, the item image effect does not suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect, and the item image effect and the setting suggestion effect are independent of each other, so that the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

(Means 12 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value which is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (for example, see FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-2 (B)), and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and as the specific display. The setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, the item image D (level 4) may be used to suggest the set value.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, attention is paid to the specific display regarding the suggestion of the set value, so that the interest is further improved. If there is no relationship between the item image effect that displays the item image corresponding to the notice effect before the execution of the notice effect and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above-mentioned game machine, the item image production is also a setting suggestion production, so that the interest is improved.

(Means 13 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the setting suggestion effect can be executed. May be different from the advance notice effect and the specific display. For example, the set value may be suggested by the effect mode (for example, the background) of the super reach effect, or the set value may be suggested by the start effect (fanfare effect) of the big hit game state.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest. If the advance notice effect, the item image effect, and the setting suggestion effect are related to each other, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be lowered. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, the advance notice effect, the item image effect, and the setting suggestion effect are produced. Because it is independent of, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Explanation of feature unit 006SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 006SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 006SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH includes a game control means and an effect executing means. The game control means is realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. The effect executing means can execute various effects (for example, various notice effects, present notice effects, setting suggestion effects, etc., which will be described later).

The front view and the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH are the same as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH (see FIG. 11-1). However, for convenience of explanation, the movable body 027SH 32 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH is referred to as the movable body 006SH 32 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH.

The jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH is the same as the jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 11-2 (A). .. The jackpot probability (high probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH is the same as the jackpot probability (high probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 11-2 (B). .. Further, the pachinko game machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH may be provided with a small hit like the pachinko game machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH, but in the following description, the pachinko game machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH may be provided. Will be described as assuming that no small hit is provided.

The type of jackpot (big hit type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH is the same as the type of jackpot (big hit type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 11-2 (C). .. The distribution of the jackpot type of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH is the same as the distribution of the jackpot type of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D) and 11-2 (E).

The content of the fluctuation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH is the pachinko machine related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), except that the fluctuation pattern # 15 (variation pattern of small hits) does not exist. This is the same as the content of the fluctuation pattern of the gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 006SH is the pachinko related to the feature portion 027SH shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), except for the portion related to the fluctuation pattern # 15 (variation pattern of small hits). This is the same as the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the gaming machine 1.

FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the advance notice effect. FIG. 12-2 is an example of the advance notice effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH can execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects as shown in FIG. 12-1. In this embodiment, each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be specified by the advance notice effect patterns.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" shown in FIG. 12-1 is the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI as shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) as a notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" (for convenience of explanation, the feature. In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the part 006SH, a weak cut-in image (referred to as 006SHYKE-JCI) is displayed. When the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" described later are not distinguished (or collectively), they are referred to as the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A".

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" shown in FIG. 12-1 is the cut-in notice effect (display of a strong cut-in image) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B) as a notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" (for convenience of explanation, the feature. In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the part 006SH, a strong cut-in image (referred to as 006SHYKE-KCI) is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-B” shown in FIG. 12-1 is the group notice effect (display of the group image) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a group image 027SHYKE-GN (for convenience of explanation, the feature unit) as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C) as a notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-B”. In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to 006SH, a group image (referred to as 006SHYKE-GN) is displayed.

The advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-C1” shown in FIG. 12-1 is the button advance notice effect (display → press → weak cut-in image of the button image) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a button image 027SHYKE-BU (for convenience of explanation) as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B) as a notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1". , In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the feature unit 006SH, a button image 006SHYKE-BU) and a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (weak cut-in image 006SHYKE-JCI) are displayed. The weak cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the weak cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect. When the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" described later are not distinguished (or collectively), they are referred to as the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C".

The advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-C2” shown in FIG. 12-1 is the button advance notice effect (display of button image → press → strong cut-in image) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a button image 027SHYKE-BU (button image 006SHYKE) as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (C) and 11-6 (D) as a notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2". -BU), the strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI (strong cut-in image 006SHYKE-KCI) is displayed. The strong cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the strong cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

The advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-D" shown in FIG. 12-1 is the accessory advance notice effect (operation of the accessory) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH is a movable body 027SH32 (movable body) as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (E) (F) (G) as a notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-D”. 006SH32) is operated.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-E" shown in FIG. 12-1 is a pseudo-continuous notice effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH executes, for example, a pseudo continuous advance notice effect as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (A), (B), and (C) as a advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-E”. .. In the example shown in FIGS. 12-2 (A), (B), and (C), after the temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP is stopped (temporarily stopped) as the middle symbol (the symbol corresponding to the symbol display area 5C), it is restarted. , The middle symbol is re-variablely displayed.

Note that FIGS. 12-2 (D), (E), and (F) relate to other notice effects (development notice effects), which will be described in detail later. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH can execute the advance notice effects of the notice effect patterns "YEP-A" to "YEP-E" shown in FIG. 12-1 as the advance notice effects. It is explained as.

12-3 and 12-4 are explanatory views for explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice effect and the like. FIG. 12-3 (A) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image or display of a strong cut-in image). According to the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), when the normal reach is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern is # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, and when the super reach is out of order (variation pattern). In the case of either # 13 or # 14, the execution presence is determined at a rate of 20%, and in the case of a normal reach jackpot (when the fluctuation pattern is # 16), the execution existence is determined at a rate of 30%. , In the case of a super reach jackpot (in the case of either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 30%. If the reach is not reached (if the fluctuation pattern is either # 10 or # 11), the presence or absence of execution is determined at a rate of 0% (determined not to be executed). The ratio of determining whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect is common to the set values 1 to 6 (it does not depend on the set value). The same applies to the determination ratio of whether or not to execute other notice effects.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH decides to execute the cut-in notice effect, it determines the notice effect pattern (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) related to the cut-in notice effect. FIG. 12-3 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the notice effect pattern (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) of the cut-in notice effect when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), in the case of normal reach loss, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 100%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is set to 0%. Determined by the ratio of. When the super reach is lost, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of a normal reach jackpot, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 50%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 50%. In the case of a super reach jackpot, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 80%. The determination ratio of the notice effect pattern of the cut-in notice effect is common to the set values 1 to 6 (it does not depend on the set value). The same applies to the determination ratio of the advance notice effect pattern of other advance notice effects.

FIG. 12-3 (C) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the group notice effect (display of the group image). Since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the group advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-B"), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH will be used for the group advance notice effect when it is decided to execute the group advance notice effect. The notice effect pattern "YEP-B" is determined as the notice effect pattern.

FIG. 12-3 (D) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the button notice effect (display of button image → press → display of weak cut-in image, or display of button image → press → display of strong cut-in image). This is an example. FIG. 12-3 (E) is an example of the determination ratio of the advance notice effect patterns (“YEP-C1” and “YEP-C2”) related to the button advance notice effect when it is decided to execute the button advance notice effect.

FIG. 12-4 (A) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the bonus notice effect (movement of the bonus). Since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the character advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-D"), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH decides to execute the character advance notice effect. The advance notice effect pattern "YEP-D" is determined as the advance notice effect pattern related to the advance notice effect.

FIG. 12-4 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed. Since there is only one type of notice effect pattern related to the pseudo-ream advance notice effect (preliminary effect pattern "YEP-E"), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH decides to execute the pseudo-ream advance notice effect. The advance notice effect pattern "YEP-E" is determined as the advance notice effect pattern related to the advance notice effect.

12-5 and 12-6 are explanatory views for explaining the present box effect and the like. The present box effect is the present box image that is not open (for example, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of FIG. 12-5 (A)) and then opened (for example, the present box image of FIG. 12-5 (B)). Present box image 006SHPB-OP) is displayed (that is, the present box is opened). In this embodiment, when the present box is opened (when the opened present box image is displayed), any of the advance notice effects shown in FIG. 12-3 (E) is executed. There are multiple types of present box effect patterns depending on the type of advance notice effect that is executed when the present box is opened (that is, which advance notice effect is executed can be specified by the present box effect pattern. Is). Since FIGS. 12-5 (C) to 12-5 (J) relate to other examples, the details will be described later.

The present box effect pattern "PBP-A" is a present box effect in which a cut-in notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (A). In the example shown in FIG. 12-6 (A), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (for example, the pachinko game related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 11-9 (A) and the like). The item image A of the machine 1 without the "level" display, etc.) is displayed, and the cut-in notice effect is executed.

The present box effect pattern "PBP-B" is a present box effect in which a group notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (B). In the example shown in FIG. 12-6 (B), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the group notice effect (for example, the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 11-9 (D) and the like). Item image B of 1 without "level" display, etc.) is displayed, and the group notice effect is executed.

The present box effect pattern "PBP-C" is a present box effect in which the button notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-6 (C), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the button notice effect (for example, the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 11-9 (G) and the like). Item image C of 1 without "level" display, etc.) is displayed, and the button notice effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (D), the present box effect pattern “PBP-D” is a present box effect in which the character advance notice effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6 (D), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the character advance notice effect (for example, the pachinko game related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 11-9 (J) and the like). The item image D of the machine 1 does not have a "level" display, etc.), and the character advance notice effect is executed.

The present box effect pattern "PBP-E" is a present box effect in which a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (E). In the example shown in FIG. 12-6 (E), when the present box is opened, an item image corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect (for example, an item image displayed as "re") is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect is displayed. Will be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 12-5 (A), 12-6 (A) to 12-6 (E), an unopened present box image (present box image 006SHPB-CL), an open present box The image (present box image 006SHPB-OP) is common regardless of the present box effect pattern. That is, the player does not know which advance notice effect will be executed before the present box is opened in the present box effect.

FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the determination ratio of whether or not the present box effect is executed. FIG. 12-7 (A) shows a present box effect (present box effect pattern “PBP-A”) targeting (targeting) the execution of the cut-in notice effect when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. This is an example of the determination rate of whether or not to execute. According to FIG. 12-7 (A), the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined to be executed at a rate of 15% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 90%. If the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is not executed, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined at a rate of 0% (when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is not executed). Does not perform present box production (PBP-A)).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (A), the present box effect (PBP-A) corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed before the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. It is more likely to be a big hit when the present box effect (PBP-A) corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is not executed before the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. That is, for example, according to the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (A), in the case of an outlier, the cut-in notice effect (PBP-A) is not accompanied by the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A). While YEP-A) is executed, in the case of a big hit, the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed with the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A) in most cases (90%). Therefore, when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed with the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A), the cut is performed without executing the present box effect (PBP-A). It is more likely to be a big hit than when the in-notice effect (YEP-A) is executed.

FIG. 12-7 (B) shows the determination of whether or not to execute the present box effect (present box effect pattern “PBP-B”) for executing the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) when the group advance notice effect is executed. This is an example of the ratio. According to FIG. 12-7 (B), the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined to be executed at a rate of 25% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 90%. If the group notice effect (YEP-B) is not executed, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined at a rate of 0% (if the group notice effect (YEP-B) is not executed). Present box production (PBP-B) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (B), as in the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A), before the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. When the present box effect (PBP-B) corresponding to the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed, it corresponds to the group notice effect (YEP-B) before the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. It is more likely to be a big hit than when the present box effect (PBP-B) is not executed.

FIG. 12-7 (C) shows the determination of whether or not to execute the present box effect (present box effect pattern “PBP-C”) for executing the button advance effect when the button advance effect (YEP-C) is executed. This is an example of the ratio. According to FIG. 12-7 (C), the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined to be executed at a rate of 10% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 60%. If the button notice effect (YEP-C) is not executed, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined at a rate of 0% (if the button notice effect (YEP-C) is not executed). Present box production (PBP-C) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (C), before the button advance notice effect (YEP-C) is executed, as in the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A). When the present box effect (PBP-C) corresponding to the button advance effect (YEP-C) is executed, the button advance effect (YEP-C) is set before the button advance effect (YEP-C) is executed. It is more likely to be a big hit than when the corresponding present box effect (PBP-C) is not executed.

FIG. 12-7 (D) shows whether or not the present box effect (present box effect pattern “PBP-D”) for executing the character advance notice effect is executed when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. This is an example of the determination ratio of. According to FIG. 12-7 (D), the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined to be executed at a rate of 5% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 80%. If the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined at a rate of 0% (when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed). Does not perform present box production (PBP-D)).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is similar to the relationship between the cut-in advance notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A). When the present box effect (PBP-D) corresponding to the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed before, the character advance notice effect (YEP) is performed before the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. It is more likely to be a big hit than when the present box effect (PBP-D) corresponding to −D) is not executed.

FIG. 12-7 (E) shows whether or not the present box effect (present box effect pattern “PBP-E”) for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed when the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed. This is an example of the determination ratio of. According to FIG. 12-7 (E), the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined to be executed at a rate of 25% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 60%. If the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is not executed, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined at a rate of 0% (when the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is not executed). Does not perform present box production (PBP-E)).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (E), the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) is executed as in the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A). When the present box effect (PBP-E) corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed before, the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP) is executed before the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed. It is more likely to be a big hit than when the present box effect (PBP-E) corresponding to −E) is not executed.

FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting suggestion effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH can execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

The setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-ATU" shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) displays, for example, the thermal character image 006SHSEP-ATU as shown in FIG. 12-8 (B). It is a hot character production. As will be described with reference to FIG. 12-9, the thermal character effect suggests a set value when it is out of order, but does not suggest a set value when it is a big hit.

The setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1" shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) is, for example, the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-, which is a normal mode as shown in FIG. 12-8 (C). This is a normal eye-catching effect that displays EYE1. In the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 shown in FIG. 12-8 (C), the character's yukata is plain. As will be described with reference to FIG. 12-10, the normal eye-catching effect is executed when the super reach is off (when either the fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14 is achieved), and the special eye-catching effect (described later) is increased. Not, but suggests a setting.

The setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect pattern “SEP-EYE2” shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) is, for example, an eye-catching image 006SHSEP- as shown in FIG. 12-8 (D). This is a special eye-catching effect that displays EYE2. In the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 shown in FIG. 12-8 (D), the character's yukata has a goldfish pattern. As will be described with reference to FIG. 12-10, the special eye-catching effect is executed when the super reach is lost (when any of the fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 14 is obtained), and the set value is suggested. When SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect) and SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching effect) are not distinguished (or collectively), they are referred to as SEP-EYE (eye-catching effect).

The eye-catching image (eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1, eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2) is an image displayed when the normal background (non-reach background) is switched from the effect background during reach.

FIG. 12-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the thermal character effect (setting suggestion effect pattern “SEP-ATU”). FIG. 12-9 (A) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the thermal character effect when the set value is 1 to 5. According to the example shown in FIG. 12-9 (A), when the normal reach is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern is # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 1%, and when the super reach A is out of order (variation). In the case of pattern # 13), the presence of execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and in the case of out of Super Reach B (in the case of fluctuation pattern # 14), the presence of execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and normal reach is determined. In the case of a big hit (when it becomes a fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach A big hit (when it becomes a fluctuation pattern # 17), the execution existence is 60%. It is decided by the ratio, and when it becomes a super reach B big hit (when it becomes the fluctuation pattern # 18), the execution presence is decided at the ratio of 70%. If the reach is not reached (if the fluctuation pattern is either # 10 or # 11), the presence or absence of execution is determined at a rate of 0% (determined not to be executed).

FIG. 12-9 (B) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the thermal character effect (setting suggestion effect pattern “SEP-ATU”) when the set value is 6. According to the example shown in FIG. 12-9 (B), when the normal reach is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern is # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the super reach A is out of order (variation). In the case of pattern # 13), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, and in the case of a deviation from Super Reach B (in the case of fluctuation pattern # 14), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, and the normal reach is determined. In the case of a big hit (when it becomes a fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach A big hit (when it becomes a fluctuation pattern # 17), the execution existence is 60%. It is decided by the ratio, and when it becomes a super reach B big hit (when it becomes the fluctuation pattern # 18), the execution presence is decided at the ratio of 70%. If the reach is not reached (if the fluctuation pattern is either # 10 or # 11), the presence or absence of execution is determined at a rate of 0% (determined not to be executed).

According to FIGS. 12-9 (A) and 12-9 (B), the hot character effect is an effect with a relatively high expectation of a big hit (an effect in which the decision rate of execution is relatively small in the case of a loss). is there. More specifically, the jackpot expectation of the thermal character effect when the set value is 1 to 5 is higher than the jackpot expectation of the thermal character effect when the set value is 6 (the thermal character in the case of a loss). The determination rate of whether or not the effect is executed is lower when the set value is 1 to 5 than when the set value is 6).

The determination rate of whether or not the thermal character effect is executed in the case of a loss is lower when the set value is 1 to 5 than when the set value is 6 (that is, when the set value is 6). (Because the setting value is higher than when the setting value is 1 to 5), the heat character effect is executed, and the frequency of loss is 1 to 1 when the setting value is 6. It is higher than when it is 5 (specifically, when focusing on the same type of reach, when the set value is 6, it is 5 times higher than when the set value is 1 to 5). Therefore, the player can infer whether the set value is 1 to 5 or the set value is 6, depending on the frequency with which the heat character effect is executed and the character is out of order. For example, a player has a hot character effect and has developed into a super reach, but the frequency of the result is usually (usually the set value is one of 1 to 5). If you feel that there are more than (S), it is possible to infer that the set value is 6.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the determination rate of whether or not the hot character effect is executed is the same between when the set value is 1 to 5 and when the set value is 6, so that the heat character effect is executed and The frequency of big hits does not change when the set value is 1 to 5 or when the set value is 6. Therefore, the player cannot infer whether the set value is 1 to 5 or the set value is 6 depending on the frequency with which the hot character effect is executed and the jackpot is hit.

That is, as described above, the thermal character effect suggests a set value when it is out of order, but does not suggest a set value when it is a big hit.

FIG. 12-10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of whether or not the eye-catching effect (normal eye-catching effect, special eye-catching effect) is executed. FIG. 12-10 (A) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not the eye-catching effect is executed. The determination ratio of whether or not to execute the eye-catching effect is common to the set values 1 to 6 (it does not depend on the set value). According to the example shown in FIG. 12-10 (A), when the super reach A is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern # 13 is reached), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 100%, and the super reach B is out of order. (In the case of fluctuation pattern # 14), the execution presence is also determined at a rate of 100%. In cases other than the above (when any of the fluctuation patterns # 10 to # 12 and # 16 to # 18 is obtained), the presence or absence of execution is determined at a rate of 0% (determined not to be executed). That is, as described above, the eye-catching effect (normal eye-catching effect, special eye-catching effect) is executed when the super reach is out of alignment (when any of the fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 14 is achieved).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH decides to execute the eye-catching effect, it determines the setting suggestion effect pattern (“SEP-EYE1”, “SEP-EYE2”) related to the eye-catching effect. 12-10 (B) shows the determination ratios of the setting suggestion effect patterns (“SEP-EYE1” and “SEP-EYE2”) when it is determined to execute the eye-catching effect when the set values are 1 to 3. This is an example. According to the example shown in FIG. 12-10 (B), when the super reach A is out of alignment, the normal eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1") is determined at a ratio of 90%, and the special eye is determined. The catch effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") is determined at a rate of 10%, and if Super Reach B is out of the range, the normal eye catch effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1") is 95%. The special eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") is determined at a rate of 5%.

FIG. 12-10 (C) shows the determination ratios of the setting suggestion effect patterns (“SEP-EYE1” and “SEP-EYE2”) when it is determined to execute the eye-catching effect when the set values are 4 to 6. This is an example. According to the example shown in FIG. 12-10 (C), when the super reach A is out of alignment, the normal eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1") is determined at a rate of 60%, and the special eye is determined. The catch effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") is determined at a rate of 40%, and if Super Reach B is out of the range, the normal eye catch effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1") is 60%. The special eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") is determined at a rate of 40%.

The determination ratio of the special eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") when Super Reach A is out of order is when the set value is 4 to 6 and when the set value is 1 to 3. Because it is higher than, Super Reach A is out of order, and the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect is executed is higher when the set value is 4 to 6 than when the set value is 1 to 3 ( Specifically, when the set value is 4 to 6, it is four times higher than when the set value is 1 to 3). Therefore, the player can infer whether the set value is 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 depending on the frequency with which the super reach A is out of alignment and the special eye-catching effect is executed. .. For example, if the player is out of Super Reach A and the special eye-catching effect is executed more frequently than usual (usually, the set value is one of 1 to 3). If you feel it, you can infer that the set value is 4-6.

The determination ratio of the special eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") when Super Reach B is out of order is when the set value is 4 to 6 and when the set value is 1 to 3. Because it is higher than, the frequency at which Super Reach B is out of order and the special eye-catching effect is executed is higher when the set value is 4 to 6 than when the set value is 1 to 3 ( Specifically, when the set value is 4 to 6, it is 8 times higher than when the set value is 1 to 3). Therefore, the player can infer whether the set value is 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 depending on the frequency with which the super reach B is out of alignment and the special eye-catching effect is executed. .. For example, if the player is out of Super Reach B and the special eye-catching effect is executed more frequently than usual (usually, the set value is one of 1 to 3). If you feel it, you can infer that the set value is 4-6.

The difference in the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect is executed depending on whether the set value is 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 is out of Super Reach A, and the special eye-catching effect is executed. The player is out of Super Reach A because it is out of Super Reach B and the case where the special eye-catching effect is executed is larger than the case (the former is 4 times difference, the latter is 8 times difference). It is easier to be confident in estimating the set value by yourself if it is out of Super Reach B and the frequency at which the special eye-catching effect is executed rather than the frequency at which the special eye-catching effect is executed. It has become. As an example, consider a case in which there are a total of two fluctuations that have evolved into Super Reach A and have become out of order, and both of them were special eye-catching effects. In this case, when the set value is 1-3. 1% (10% x 10%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), while it evolved into Super Reach B and eventually became out of sync. Considering the case where there were a total of two fluctuations and both were special eye-catching effects, the case was 0.25% (5% x 5%. The denominator was super reach) when the set value was 1-3. Since it occurs only at the rate of the number of fluctuations that evolved into A and eventually became out of order (that is, there were a total of two fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), and both were special eyes. Compared to the case where it was a catch effect, the set value is 1 to 3 in the case where there were a total of 2 fluctuations that developed into Super Reach B and eventually became out of order, and both were special eye catch effects. (Because it is easy to deny that it is), the set value is estimated (because it is easy to deny that), in the case where there were a total of 2 fluctuations that developed into Super Reach B and eventually became out of order, and both were special eye-catching effects ( It is easier to be confident in the set value (estimated to be 4 to 6 instead of 1 to 3).

If the special eye-catching effect is not executed at the out-of-super reach, the normal eye-catching effect is executed (see FIGS. 12-10 (B) (C)). , It is synonymous with the non-execution of the special eye-catching production at the out of super reach. Therefore, although not as much as the suggestion by the special eye-catching effect, the set value is also suggested by the normal eye-catching effect. As an example, considering a case in which there are a total of two fluctuations that have evolved into Super Reach A and are eventually out of order, and both of them are normal eye-catching effects, the set value is 1 to 3 in this case. It occurs at a rate of 81% (90% x 90%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), and 36% (60%) when the set value is 4 to 6. × 60%. Since the denominator is generated at the ratio of the number of fluctuations that developed into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), even if the set value is estimated, it seems to be a relatively uncertain estimation. On the other hand, considering the case where there were a total of two fluctuations that developed into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order, and both were special eye-catching effects, this case is when the set value is 1-3. It occurs at a rate of 1% (10% x 10%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), and 24% (40% x 40%) when the set value is 4 to 6. 40%. Since the denominator is generated at the ratio of the number of fluctuations that developed into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), even if it is estimated that the set value is 4 to 6 instead of 1 to 3, it is divided. Seems to be a valid estimate. In other words, there were a total of two fluctuations that developed into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order, and compared to the case where both were normal eye-catching productions, it developed into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order. It is easier to estimate the set value in the case where there are a total of two fluctuations and both times are special eye-catching effects.

FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing and the like of various effects in the variable display that becomes super reach.

In FIG. 12-11, T0 is the start timing of the variable display. T1 is the timing at which the present box image (the unopened present box image 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5 (A)) is displayed when the present box effect is executed. In T1, a plurality of present box images (present box image 006SHPB-CL) are displayed when a plurality of present box effects corresponding to each of the plurality of advance notice effects are executed. For example, a present box effect (PBP-A) for executing the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and a present box effect (PBP-) for executing the group notice effect (YEP-B). When executing B), two present box images (present box image 006SHPB-CL) are displayed. T2 is the timing to reach.

T3 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-A) for executing the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. In other words, T3 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T4 is the timing to start the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A). T5 is the timing to end the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A). That is, T4 to T5 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A).

T6 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-B) for executing the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. In other words, T6 changes one of the unopened present box image 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T7 is the timing to start the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). T8 is the timing to end the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). That is, T7 to T8 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B).

T9 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-E) for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed. In other words, T9 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T10 is the timing at which the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is started. T13 is a timing at which the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is finished. That is, T10 to T13 are execution periods of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E).

T11 is the timing to start the execution of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU). T12 is the timing to end the execution of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU). That is, T11 to T12 are execution periods of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-C) for executing the button notice effect (YEP-C) is executed. In other words, T15 changes one of the unopened present box image 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T16 is the timing to start the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C). T17 is the timing to end the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C). That is, T17 to T18 are execution periods of the button notice effect (YEP-C).

T18 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-D) for executing the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. In other words, T18 changes one of the unopened present box image 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T19 is the timing to start the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). T20 is the timing at which the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is finished. That is, T19 to T20 are execution periods of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D).

Ta21 to Ta22 are the out-of-print symbol stop display periods in the case of out-of-order. Ta22 to Ta23 are execution periods of the eye-catching effect. Tb21 to Tb23 are jackpot symbol stop display periods in the case of a jackpot.

12-12 to 12-14 are specific examples of various timings. In FIG. 12-12 (A), the fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach (fluctuation pattern # 12), the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed, and the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed. It shows various timings when the present box effect (PBP-A) is executed. The setting suggestion effect (heat character effect, eye-catching effect) is not executed.

In FIG. 12-12 (A), T1 is the timing at which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed. That is, in T1, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) for executing the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is displayed. T2 is the timing to reach.

T3 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T4 to T5 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1).

In FIG. 12-12 (B), the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16), and the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2), the group notice effect (YEP-B), and the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). ) Is executed, and a present box effect (PBP-B) for executing the group notice effect (YEP-B) and a present box effect (PBP-) for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). E) and are executed, and various timings when the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU) is executed are shown.

In FIG. 12-12 (B), T1 is the timing at which the two present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed. That is, in T1, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-B) for the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B) and the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed. The present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) is displayed. T2 is the timing to reach.

T4 to T5 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2). That is, the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) is executed without the present box effect (PBP-A) being performed (without changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP). To.

T6 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-B) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T7 to T8 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B).

T9 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10 to T13 are execution periods of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). T11 to T12 are execution periods of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU).

In FIG. 12-13, the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach B (fluctuation pattern # 14), the button notice effect (YEP-C1) and the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the button notice effect (YEP) is executed. -The present box effect (PBP-C) for the execution of C1) and the present box effect (PBP-E) for the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the hot character effect (PBP-E) is executed. It shows various timings when the SEP-ATU) and the special eye-catching effect (SEP-EYE2) are executed.

In FIG. 12-13, T1 is the timing at which the two present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed. That is, in T1, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-C) for the execution of the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1) and the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) are targeted for execution. The present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) is displayed. T2 is the timing to reach.

T9 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10 to T13 are execution periods of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). T11 to T12 are execution periods of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-C) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T17 to T18 are execution periods of the button notice effect (YEP-C1). Ta21 to Ta22 are outlier symbol stop display periods. Ta22 to Ta23 are execution periods of the special eye-catching effect.

In FIG. 12-14, the fluctuation pattern is a super reach B jackpot (variation pattern # 18), and the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2), the group advance notice effect (YEP-B), and the button advance notice effect (YEP-C2). The character notice effect (YEP-D) and the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the present box effect (PBP-A) and the group notice for the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) are executed. Present box effect (PBP-B) for execution of effect (YEP-B), present box effect (PBP-C) for execution of button advance notice effect (YEP-C2), and character advance notice effect (YEP) The present box effect (PBP-D) for the execution of −D) and the present box effect (PBP-E) for the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the hot character effect (PBP-E) is executed. It shows various timings when SEP-ATU) is executed.

In FIG. 12-14, T1 is the timing at which the five present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed. That is, in T1, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) for the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) and the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) are targeted for execution. Present box effect (PBP-B) present box image 006SHPB-CL, present box effect (PBP-C) present box image 006SHPB-CL for executing button advance notice effect (YEP-C2) Present box production (PBP-D) for the execution of (YEP-D) Present box image 006SHPB-CL, Present box production (PBP-E) for the execution of pseudo-continuous notice production (YEP-E) Present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed. T2 is the timing to reach.

T3 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T4 to T5 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2).

T6 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-B) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T7 to T8 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B).

T9 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10 to T13 are execution periods of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). T11 to T12 are execution periods of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-C) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T17 to T18 are execution periods of the button notice effect (YEP-C2).

T19 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-D) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T19 to T20 are execution periods of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). Tb21 to Tb22 are jackpot symbol stop display periods.

(Direction decision process A (decision about notice production and present box production)
12-15 to 12-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect determination process A executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9. The flowchart of FIG. 12-16 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 12-15. The flowchart of FIG. 12-17 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 12-16.

In the effect determination process A shown in FIG. 12-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS100). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0% if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11). However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is possible. Is determined at a rate of 20%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), execution is determined at a rate of 30%, and the fluctuation pattern is either super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17 or # 18). If), the execution status is determined at a rate of 30%.

Following step 006SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is determined to be executed (step 006SHS101). If it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS101; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS102. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS101; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS110.

Following step 006SHS101 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS102). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 100%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-". "A2" is determined by 0%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 80% and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 20%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 50% and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 50%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 20% and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 80%.

Following step 006SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" or advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2") of the cut-in advance notice effect determined in step 006SHS102 (step). 006SHS103).

Following step 006SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-A) for executing the cut-in notice effect (target) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS104). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is a deviation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-A) is executed at a rate of 15%. If the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined at a rate of 90%.

Following step 006SHS104, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined to be executed (step 006SHS105). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-A) is to be executed (step 006SHS105; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS106. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-A) is to be executed (step 006SHS105; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS110.

Following step 006SHS105 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-A” (step 006SHS106).

Following step 006SHS101 (NO), step 006SHS105 (NO), or step 006SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the group notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS110). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is possible. Is determined at a rate of 30%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), execution is determined at a rate of 25%, and the fluctuation pattern is either super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17 or # 18). If), the execution status is determined at a rate of 50%.

Following step 006SHS110, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step 006SHS111). If it is determined that the group notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS111; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS113. If it is not determined that the group advance notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS111; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS120 of FIG. 12-16.

Following step 006SHS111 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-B” for the group advance notice effect (step 006SHS113).

Following step 006SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-B) targeting (targeting) the execution of the group notice effect (step 006SHS114). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is a deviation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-B) is executed at a rate of 25%. If the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined at a rate of 90%.

Following step 006SHS114, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined to be executed (step 006SHS115). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-B) is to be executed (step 006SHS115; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS116. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-B) is to be executed (step 006SHS115; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS120 of FIG. 12-16.

Following step 006SHS115 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-B” (step 006SHS116).

Following step 006SHS101 (NO), step 006SHS105 (NO), or step 006SHS106 of FIG. 12-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button advance effect based on the fluctuation pattern (FIG. 12-16). Step 006SHS120). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (D), if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is possible. Is determined at a rate of 25%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and the fluctuation pattern is either super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17 or # 18). If), the execution status is determined at a rate of 50%.

Following step 006SHS120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the button advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step 006SHS121). If it is determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS121; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS122. If it is not determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS121; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS130.

Following step 006SHS121 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of button advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS122). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (E), if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 90%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP". -C2 "is determined by 10%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 10% and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" at 90%.

Following step 006SHS122, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" or advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2") of the button advance notice effect determined in step 006SHS122 (step 006SHS123). ).

Following step 006SHS123, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-C) targeting (targeting) the execution of the button notice effect (step 006SHS124). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (C), if the fluctuation pattern is a deviation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-C) is executed at a rate of 10%. If the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined at a rate of 60%.

Following step 006SHS124, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined to be executed (step 006SHS125). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-C) is to be executed (step 006SHS125; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS126. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-C) is to be executed (step 006SHS125; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS130.

Following step 006SHS125 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-C” (step 006SHS126).

Following step 006SHS121 (NO), step 006SHS125 (NO), or step 006SHS126, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS130). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is possible. Is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and the fluctuation pattern is either super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17 or # 18). If), the execution status is determined at a rate of 75%.

Following step 006SHS130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the accessory advance notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS131). If it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS131; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS133. If it is not determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS131; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS140 of FIG. 12-17.

Following step 006SHS131 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C" of the accessory advance notice effect (step 006SHS133).

Following step 006SHS133, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-D) for executing the character advance notice effect (target) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS134). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), if the fluctuation pattern is a deviation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-D) is executed at a rate of 5%. If the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined at a rate of 80%.

Following step 006SHS134, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined to be executed (step 006SHS135). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-D) is to be executed (step 006SHS135; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS136. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-D) is executed (step 006SHS135; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS140 of FIG. 12-17.

Following step 006SHS135 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-D” (step 006SHS136).

Following step 006SHS131 (NO), step 006SHS135 (NO), or step 006SHS136 of FIG. 12-16, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (FIG. 12-). Step 006SHS140 of 17). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is possible. Is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 25%, and the fluctuation pattern is either super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17 or # 18). If), the execution status is determined at a rate of 60%.

Following step 006SHS140, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is executed (step 006SHS141). If it is determined that the pseudo-continuous notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS141; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS143. If it is not determined that the pseudo-continuous notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS141; NO), this flowchart ends.

Following step 006SHS141 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-E” for the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (step 006SHS143).

Following step 006SHS143, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-E) targeting (targeting) the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (step 006SHS144). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (E), if the fluctuation pattern is a deviation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-E) is executed at a rate of 25%. If the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the execution presence of the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined at a rate of 60%.

Following step 006SHS144, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined to be executed (step 006SHS145). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-E) is to be executed (step 006SHS145; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS146. If it is not determined that the present box effect (PBP-E) is to be executed (step 006SHS145; NO), this flowchart ends.

Following step 006SHS145 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-E” (step 006SHS146). Then, this flowchart ends.

(Direction determination process B (Decision about setting suggestion effect)
FIG. 12-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process B executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. It should be noted that which of the effect determination process A described with reference to FIGS. 12-15 to 12-17 and the effect determination process B described with reference to FIG. 12-18 is executed first in the variable display start setting process (S171). You may.

In the effect determination process B shown in FIG. 12-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the thermal character effect based on the current set value and the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS200). For example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is any one of 1 to 5, the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (variation patterns # 10, #) as shown in FIG. 12-9 (A). If it is any of 11), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 1%, and the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A. If it is out of order (fluctuation pattern # 13), it is determined that there is execution at a rate of 2%, and if the variation pattern is out of Super Reach B (variation pattern # 14), it is determined that there is execution at a rate of 2%. If is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach A jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 17), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 60%. If the pattern is a super reach B jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 18), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 70%. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is 6, the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either the fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11) as shown in FIG. 12-9 (B). If it is, the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 5%, and the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach A (variation pattern # 12). If it is 13), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, if the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach B (variation pattern # 14), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, and the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation). If the pattern is # 16), the execution is determined at a rate of 40%, if the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A jackpot (variation pattern # 17), the execution is determined at a rate of 60%, and the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach B. If it is a big hit (variation pattern # 18), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 70%.

Following step 006SHS200, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the thermal character effect is executed (step 006SHS201). If it is determined that the thermal character effect is to be executed (step 006SHS201; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS203. If it is not determined that the thermal character effect is to be executed (step 006SHS201; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS210.

Following step 006SHS201 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-ATU" for the thermal character effect (step 006SHS203).

Following step 006SHS201 (NO) or step 006SHS203, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the eye-catching effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS210). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (fluctuation patterns # 13, # 14), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute at a rate of 100%. If it is not, the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 006SHS210, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the eye-catching effect is determined to be executed (step 006SHS211). If it is determined that the eye-catching effect is to be executed (step 006SHS211; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS212. If it is not determined that the eye-catching effect is to be executed (step 006SHS211; NO), this flowchart ends.

Following step 006SHS211 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of eye-catching effect (that is, the setting suggestion effect pattern) based on the current set value and the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS212). For example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is any of 1 to 3, the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach A (variation pattern # 13) as shown in FIG. 12-10 (B). If so, the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 90%, and the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 10%. If the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach B (fluctuation pattern # 14), the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 95%, and the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-" is determined. "EYE2 (special eye-catching effect)" will be decided at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is any of 4 to 6, the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach A (variation pattern # 13) as shown in FIG. 12-10 (C). If so, the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 60%, and the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 40%. If the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach B (fluctuation pattern # 14), the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 60%, and the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-" is determined. "EYE2 (special eye-catching effect)" is decided at a rate of 40%.

Following step 006SHS212, the effect control CPU 120 sets a setting suggestion effect pattern (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1" or setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") for the eye-catching effect determined in step 006SHS212. (Step 006SHS213).

12-19 to 12-22 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 006SH. Specifically, FIGS. 12-19 to 12-22 show the main scenes in the example shown in FIG. 12-12 (B) as an example, and FIG. 12-19 (A) → FIG. 12-19 (B) → Fig. 12-19 (C) → Fig. 12-20 (A) → Fig. 12-20 (B) → Fig. 12-20 (C) → Fig. 12-21 (A) → Fig. 12- The transition is in the order of 21 (B) → FIG. 12-21 (C) → FIG. 12-22 (A) → FIG. 12-22 (B) → FIG. 12-22 (C). In addition, in FIG. 12-19 (A) (the same applies to other figures; reference numerals are omitted in other figures), the active display area 006SHAHA which is the display area of the active display, the active display 006SHAH displayed in the active display area 006SHAHA, and Is displayed.

FIG. 12-19 (A) is a scene before reaching in the variable display. FIG. 12-19 (B) is a scene (the scene of T1 in FIG. 12-12 (B)) in which two present box images 006SHPB-CL are displayed. The two present box images 006SHPB-CL displayed are not distinguished in terms of display mode, but are presents of the present box effect (PBP-B) for executing the group notice effect (YEP-B). The box image 006SHPB-CL, and the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). FIG. 12-19 (C) is a scene of reaching in the variable display.

FIG. 12-20 (A) shows a scene in which the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) is performed, that is, a scene in which the strong cut-in image 006SHYKE-KCI is displayed (T4 in FIG. 12-12 (B)). ~ T5 scene).

FIG. 12-20 (B) is a scene in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP (a scene of T6 in FIG. 12-12 (B)). In the scene shown in FIG. 12-20 (B), the item corresponding to the change of the present box image 006SHPB-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box) and corresponding to the group notice production. An image (an item image displayed as "group") is displayed.

12-20 (C) shows a scene in which the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) is performed, that is, a scene in which the group image 006SHYKE-GN is displayed (T7 to T8 in FIG. 12-12 (B)). (Scene). The present box image 006SHPB-OP (the same applies to the item image corresponding to the group notice effect) is deleted before the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed (for example, immediately before T7). Further, the timing of erasing the present box image 006SHPB-OP and the item image to be deleted when the notice effect is executed does not have to be before the execution of the notice effect (for example, the execution start timing of the notice effect and the notice effect). It may be any timing during the execution of, the execution end timing of the notice effect, etc.).

FIG. 12-21 (A) is a scene in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP (a scene of T9 in FIG. 12-12 (B)). In the scene of FIG. 12-21 (A), it corresponds to the change of the present box image 006SHPB-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box), and corresponds to the pseudo-continuous notice production. The item image (the item image displayed as "re") is displayed.

12-21 (B) to 12-22 (B) are scenes in which the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is performed (scenes of T10 to T13 in FIG. 12-12 (B)). Further, FIG. 12-21 (C) is a scene in which the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU) is performed (scenes of T11 to T12 in FIG. 12-12 (B)). FIG. 12-22 (C) is a scene in which the jackpot symbol is displayed.

The temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP is displayed in FIGS. 12-21 (B) to 12-22 (A), and the revariable display is performed in FIGS. 12-22 (B). Further, in FIG. 12-21 (C), the thermal character image 006SHSEP-ATU is also displayed in addition to the temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP, but the thermal character image 006SHSEP-ATU is on the front side of the temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP. It is displayed. That is, the hot character effect is executed with priority over the pseudo-continuous notice effect. In addition, in FIGS. 12-21 (B) to 12-22 (B), an example in which "temporary stop-> revariable display" is performed once as a pseudo-ream notice effect (YEP-E) is shown. As a notice effect (YEP-E), "temporary stop-> revariable display" may be performed twice or more.

12-23 to 12-25 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 006SH. Specifically, FIGS. 12-23 to 12-25 show a part of the scenes in the example shown in FIG. 12-13 as an example, and FIG. 12-23 (A) → FIG. 12-. 23 (B) → FIG. 12-23 (C) → FIG. 12-24 (A) → FIG. 12-24 (B) → FIG. 12-24 (C) → FIG. 12-25 (A) → FIG. 12-25 ( B) → Transition in the order of FIG. 12-25 (C).

FIG. 12-23 (A) is a scene immediately before the development into super reach (super reach B) (a scene immediately before T14 in FIG. 12-13). In the variable display (variable display shown in FIG. 12-13), a present box effect (PBP) for executing two present box images 006SHPB-CL (button notice effect (YEP-C)) is performed on T1. -C) present box image 006SHPB-CL, present box image 006SHPB-CL of present box effect (PBP-E) for executing pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is displayed, but FIG. 12 In the scene of -23 (A) (the scene immediately before T14), the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) has already been completed (in the scenes of T10 to T13), so one present box image 006SHPB. -CL (present box image 006SHPB-CL of present box effect (PBP-C) for executing button notice effect (YEP-C)) is displayed.

FIG. 12-23 (B) is a scene developed into super reach (scene of T14 in FIG. 12-13).

FIG. 12-23 (C) is a scene in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP (the scene of T15 in FIG. 12-13). In the scene shown in FIG. 12-23 (C), the item corresponding to the change of the present box image 006SHPB-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box) and the button notice effect. An image (an item image with a button image drawn) is displayed.

12-24 (A) and 12-24 (B) are scenes in which the button notice effect (YEP-C1) is performed (scenes T16 to T17 in FIGS. 12-13). In FIG. 12-24 (A), the button image 006SHYKE-BU is displayed, and by pressing the button, the weak cut-in image 006SHYKE-JCI is displayed in FIG. 12-24 (A).

FIG. 12-24 (C) is a scene immediately before the outlier symbol is displayed in the super reach (super reach B) (a scene immediately before Ta21 in FIG. 12-13). 12-25 (A) and 12-25 (B) are scenes in which the out-of-order symbols are displayed (scenes of Ta21 to Ta22 in FIGS. 12-13). In FIG. 12-25 (A), the small symbol "767" is displayed, and in FIG. 12-25 (B), the decorative symbol "767" is displayed.

FIG. 12-25 (C) is a scene in which a special eye-catching effect (SEP-EYE2) is performed (scenes of Ta22 to Ta23 in FIGS. 12-13). In FIG. 12-25 (C), an eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 (character image of a yukata with a goldfish pattern), which is a special aspect, is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-25 (C), the small symbol "767" can be visually recognized while the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 is being displayed (the same applies to the display of the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 (not shown)). It has become. The "" "shown at the four corners of the numbers" 7 "," 6 ", and" 7 "of the small symbol" 767 "in FIG. 12-25 (C) indicates that the small symbol" 767 "is shaking. It was done. In addition, instead of or in addition to the small symbol "767" in FIG. 12-25 (C), the small symbol "767" in FIG. 12-25 (A) may also be shaken.

While the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 is being displayed (the same applies to the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 not shown), the reach-compatible small symbols (such as the above-mentioned shaking small symbol "767") are not displayed. It may be displayed so that a small symbol (a small symbol that is stopped and displayed by a symbol confirmation command) can be visually recognized at all times.

While the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 is being displayed (the same applies to the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 not shown), the active display 006SHAH, the hold display, and the number of holds display (the first corresponding to the first special figure game). The number of reserved storages, the number of second reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game, which are indicated by numbers or the like) may be displayed.

12-26 and 12-27 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 006SH. Specifically, FIGS. 12-26 and 12-27 show a part of the scenes in the example shown in FIG. 12-14 as an example, and FIG. 12-26 (A) → FIG. 12-. The transition is in the order of 26 (B) → FIG. 12-26 (C) → FIG. 12-27 (A) → FIG. 12-27 (B) → FIG. 12-27 (C).

FIG. 12-26 (A) shows five present box images 006SHPB-CL (present box image 006SHPB-CL of present box effect (PBP-A) for executing the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A)). Present box effect (PBP-B) present box image 006SHPB-CL for execution of group notice effect (YEP-B), present box effect (PBP-) for execution of button advance notice effect (YEP-C) C) present box image 006SHPB-CL, present box effect (PBP-D) present box image 006SHPB-CL, pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) for executing the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) It is a scene (the scene of T1 of FIG. 12-14) in which the present box image 006SHPB-CL) of the present box effect (PBP-E) for the execution of is displayed.

FIG. 12-26 (B) shows the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the last one present box image 006SHPB-CL (present box effect (PBP-D) for executing the character advance notice effect (YEP-D)). This is a scene immediately before the CL) changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (the scene immediately before T18 in FIG. 12-14).

FIG. 12-26 (C) is a scene in which the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (the scene of T18 in FIG. 12-14). In the scene of FIG. 12-26 (C), it corresponds to the change of the present box image 006SHPB-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box), and corresponds to the character advance notice production. An item image (an item image on which the movable body 006SH32 is drawn) is displayed.

12-27 (A) is a scene (the scenes of T19 to T20 of FIG. 12-14) in which the character advance notice production (YEP-D) is performed. In FIG. 12-27 (A), the movable body 006SH32 is operating.

12-27 (B) and (C) are scenes in which the jackpot symbol is displayed (scenes of Tb21 to Tb22 in FIGS. 12-14). In FIG. 12-27 (B), the small symbol "777" is displayed, and in FIG. 12-27 (C), the decorative symbol "777" is displayed.

(About the modified example of the game machine related to the feature unit 006SH)
Subsequently, a modified example of the game machine related to the feature unit 006SH will be described.

(Modification example 1 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above description, after the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (after the present box is opened), the present box image 006SHPB-OP and the item image are deleted. , One of the two may be erased, and the other may continue to be displayed without being erased. Moreover, you may continue to display both without erasing.

(Modification example 2 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above description, when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP, an item image corresponding to one notice effect actually executed is displayed (for example, FIG. 12-20 (for example, FIG. 12-20). In B), the item image corresponding to the group notice effect executed in FIG. 12-20 (C) is displayed, etc.), but a plurality of advance notice effects including one actually executed advance notice effect are described. The item image corresponding to may be displayed. For example, in FIG. 12-20 (B), an item image (for example, an item image indicated as “group / re” or the like) corresponding to the group notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect may be displayed.

(Modification example 3 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above description, an example in which the item image is displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP has been described, but the present box image 006SHPB-CL has been changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. Sometimes it is not necessary to display the item image. If the item image is displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP, the item image is displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. The degree of expectation that will be a big hit may be different depending on when it is not done.

(Modification example 4 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the example in which the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed at a fixed timing has been described, but the present box image 006SHPB-CL may be displayed at any of a plurality of types. Depending on the timing at which the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be different.

(Modification example 5 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, when displaying a plurality of present box images 006SHPB-CL, an example of displaying a plurality of present boxes together has been described. However, when displaying a plurality of present box images 006SHPB-CL, one present box is displayed. The image 006SHPB-CL may be displayed. The degree of expectation of a big hit may be different depending on whether a plurality of items are displayed together or one by one.

(Variation example 6 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is simply displayed (without executing any effect), but an example has been described. However, when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed, the effect (for example, the character) is displayed. An effect of displaying the present box image 006SHPB-CL by magic or magic, an effect of the character carrying the present box image 006SHPB-CL, etc.) may be executed. The degree of expectation of a big hit may be different depending on whether the present box image 006SHPB-CL is simply displayed or the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed after the production. Further, there may be a case where the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed after the effect and a case where the present box image 006SHPB-CL is not displayed after the effect. For example, there may be a case where the magic succeeds and the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed, and a case where the magic fails and the present box image 006SHPB-CL is not displayed.

(Modification example 7 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the present box image 006SHPB-CL has been described as an example of displaying at the left end of the display area of the image display device 5, but may be displayed at another position. For example, it may be displayed in the vicinity of the active display area 006 SHAHA (see FIG. 12-19) (for example, the upper part of the active display 006 SHAH). When there are a plurality of them, they may be displayed side by side in the vicinity of the active display area 006 SHAHA.

(Modification example 8 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, although the execution timing and the like of each advance notice effect have been described with reference to FIGS. 12-11, FIG. 12-11 is an example, and each effect may be executed at another execution timing.

As an example of the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect will be described. In the example of FIG. 12-11, the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect is earlier than the execution start timing of the group notice effect, but the execution start of the cut-in notice effect. The timing may be later than the execution start timing of the group notice effect. Further, in the example of FIG. 12-11, the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect is before the development, but the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect may be after the development. Further, the cut-in notice effect may be executed at any one of a plurality of timings. The degree of expectation of a big hit may be different depending on the execution start timing. Further, in the example of FIG. 12-11, the cut-in notice effect can be executed only once (although the execution start timing is only one place), but it may be executed twice or more (execution start). There may be two or more timings).

As an example of the setting suggestion effect, the heat character effect will be described. In the example of FIG. 12-11, the execution start timing of the heat character effect is later than the execution start timing of the group notice effect, but the execution start timing of the heat character effect is It may be earlier than the execution start timing of the group notice effect. Further, in the example of FIG. 12-11, the execution start timing of the hot character is before the development, but the execution start timing of the hot character may be after the development. The thermal character effect may be executed at any one of a plurality of timings. Further, in the example of FIG. 12-11, the thermal character effect can be executed only once (although the execution start timing is only one place), but it may be executed twice or more (execution start timing). There may be two or more places).

(Modification example 9 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, when the hot character effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect overlap, the example in which the hot character effect is prioritized over the pseudo-continuous notice effect (“heat” is displayed on the front side, etc.) has been described (Fig. 12-21). (C)), the same may be applied to the relationship between the heat character effect and other advance notice effects (excluding the character advance notice effects). That is, when the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect) and the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous advance notice effect, etc.) overlap, the setting suggestion effect may be prioritized.

(Modification example 10 of feature unit 006SH)
In relation to the modification 9, when the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect overlap, the one with the shorter execution time may be preferentially executed. In the present embodiment, the execution time of the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect) and the notice effect (pseudo-continuous notice effect, etc.) is shorter in the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect) (see FIG. 12-11). ), When the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect) and the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous advance notice effect, etc.) overlap, the setting suggestion effect is prioritized (see FIG. 12-21 (C)). Further, when the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect overlap, the one with the least appearance frequency may be preferentially executed. The frequency of appearance may be logical (calculated) or may be based on the actual operating status (on the day, etc.).

(Modification example 11 of feature portion 006SH)
In the above, there is a thermal character effect (see FIG. 12-9) that suggests whether the set value is 1 to 5 or 6 and the set value is 1 to 3. An eye-catching effect (see FIG. 12-10) that suggests whether the set value is present or the set value is any of 4 to 6 has been described as a set value suggestion effect, but the suggestion target is not limited to the above. .. For example, it suggests whether it is an odd number setting (whether the set value is 1, 3, 5) or an even number setting (whether the set value is 2, 4, or 6). The setting suggestion effect may be executed. Also, for example, whether it is a low setting (set value is 1 or 2), a medium setting (set value is 3 or 4), or a high setting (set value is 5). Or is it?) May be executed.

(Modification example 12 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the setting suggestion effects in which the suggestion targets (heat character effect: "1 to 5" or "6", eye-catching effect: "1 to 3" or "4 to 6") are different from each other have been described. The same different setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, in a certain variation (for example, in super reach B (variation patterns # 14, # 18), only the effect A is executed, and only the effect B (the jackpot reliability is the same as the effect A) is executed. In some cases, neither A nor the effect B is executed, and as the effect mode of the effect A when the effect A is executed, when the setting value is 1, the effect A in the normal mode is 75% (the effect A in the special mode is 25). %), And when the set value is 6, the effect A in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 25% (the effect A in the special mode is 75%), and when the effect B is executed. As the effect mode of the effect B, when the set value is 1, the effect A in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 99% (the effect A in the special mode is 0.1%), and when the setting value is 6, the effect A in the normal mode is executed. The effect A may be executed at a rate of 1% (the effect A of the special aspect is 99.9%). According to the above, both the effect A and the effect B have the same suggestion target (“1 to 5”). "Or" 6 "), but the reliability of the set value suggestion (for example, the suggestion that the set value is" 6 ") is different between the effect A and the effect B. That is, the effect A in the normal mode. The reliability of the jackpot is the same when is executed, when the special mode effect A is executed, when the normal mode effect B is executed, and when the special mode effect B is executed, but the special aspect is special. When the effect B of the aspect is executed, the reliability (accuracy of suggestion) that the set value is 6 is higher than that when the effect A of the special aspect is executed.

(Modification example 13 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, an example in which the set value suggestion effect suggests the current set value has been described, but it may suggest whether or not the set value is changed. The hot character effect (or eye-catching effect) may suggest whether or not the set value has been changed, or the setting suggestion effect different from the hot character effect or eye-catching effect suggests whether or not the set value has been changed. You may try to do it.

(Modification example 14 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the example in which the player's action is not involved when the set value suggestion effect is executed has been described, but the player's action may be involved when the set value suggestion effect is executed. As an example, a promotion effect that encourages the player to move (button operation, screen touch, operation of a model (lever, sword, gun, etc.) provided on the outer frame, etc.) within a predetermined period before the start of execution of the heat character effect. May be executed to execute the heat character effect when the player moves within the predetermined period (when the player does not move within the predetermined period, the heat character effect is always performed. It may not be executed, and the thermal character effect may or may not be executed).

(Variation example 15 of the feature portion 006SH)
In the above, the eye-catching effect has been described as a setting suggestion effect that is not executed when a big hit occurs and is executed when a deviation occurs. Is not limited to eye-catching production. For example, in a scene where a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character in a battle super reach (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 12-25 (A)), the enemy character (or the dialogue of the friendly character) has one of a plurality of types of dialogue. It is also possible to execute the emitted dialogue effect and suggest the set value according to the type of the emitted dialogue and the like. For example, when the set value is any of 1 to 3, the line A is determined as the line of the enemy character at a rate of 65% and the line B is determined at a rate of 35%, and when the set value is any of 4 to 6, the enemy is determined. As the dialogue of the character, dialogue A may be determined at a determination rate of 35% and dialogue B may be determined at a determination ratio of 65%. For example, when the set value is any of 1 to 3, the line without dialogue is determined at a rate of 60%, the dialogue of the enemy character is determined at 30%, the dialogue of the ally character is determined at a determination rate of 10%, and the set value is any of 4 to 6. When this is the case, the dialogue of the enemy character may be determined by 60%, the dialogue of the enemy character may be determined by 10%, and the dialogue of the ally character may be determined by 30%.

From the scene where the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 12-25 (A)) to the scene where the ally character wins the enemy character (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 12-27 (B)). When there is a possibility that the transitional reversal effect is executed, the above-mentioned dialogue effect may not be executed when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character. Alternatively, the above-mentioned dialogue effect may be executed after it is completely denied that the reverse effect is executed (timing after the timing at which the reverse effect is executed).

(Modification example 16 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the setting suggestion effect (eye catch effect) that is executed when the jackpot is not executed and is not executed, and the setting suggestion effect (heat character) that is executed both when the jackpot is hit and when the hit is off. However, it is possible to provide a setting suggestion effect that is not executed when it is out of order and is executed when it is a big hit. For example, it is possible to execute a jackpot confirmation notification effect that notifies a jackpot during variable display, and there are a plurality of types of production modes of the jackpot confirmation notification effect, and when it is a special mode, a set value (or setting change) is suggested. You may do so.

As an example, it is possible to execute a definite notification effect that causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in rainbow colors during variable display, and when it is in a normal light emission mode (for example, blinking at a normal speed), it notifies the confirmation of a big hit and emits special light. In the mode (for example, blinking of a special speed), the confirmation of the jackpot may be notified and the set value (or the setting change) may be suggested. As another example, it is possible to execute a definite notification effect (full rotation effect) in which the decorative symbols are rotated in a state where the numbers are aligned during the variable display, and a normal effect mode (for example, full rotation in the forward direction from top to bottom). When it is, the confirmation of the big hit is notified, and when it is a special effect mode (for example, full rotation in the reverse direction from the bottom to the top), the confirmation of the big hit is notified and the set value (or the setting change) is suggested. It may be.

(Modification example 17 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, as the advance notice effect, the cut-in advance notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), the group advance notice effect (YEP-B), the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2), and the character advance notice effect (YEP- D), an example of executing the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) has been described, but the advance notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the development notice effect as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (D), (E), and (F) may be executed. In the example shown in FIGS. 12-2 (D), (E), and (F), the background image is cracked like glass during the reach, which leads to a super reach.

(Modification example 18 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, for example, when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed, the present box effect (PBP-A) targeting the execution of the cut-in notice effect (PBP-A) is executed. Although the example of executing the present box effect for the execution of the notice effect has been described, when the notice effect is executed, another effect may be executed for the execution of the notice effect. For example, in the case of executing the notice effect, the timer effect may be executed in place of or in addition to the present box effect for the execution of the notice effect.

For example, a timer image displaying the remaining time (see, for example, FIG. 12-5 (C)) is displayed, the remaining time is gradually reduced, and a timer image with zero remaining time (for example, FIG. 12-5 (D)) is displayed. ) Is displayed, the item image may be displayed (or the item image may not be displayed), and any of the advance notice effects may be executed. The degree of expectation of a big hit may be different depending on whether the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed or the timer image is displayed.

In addition, the present box image and the timer image may be displayed at the same time. For example, when two present box images are displayed when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the group notice effect (YEP) are executed (the present box image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and the group notice). When the present box image corresponding to the effect is displayed) or when two timer images are displayed (the timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and the timer image corresponding to the group notice effect are displayed). In addition to the case), when one present box image and one timer image are displayed (when the present box image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and the timer image corresponding to the group notice effect are displayed, or There may be a timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and a present box image corresponding to the group notice effect). In the case of executing a plurality of advance notice effects, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be different depending on whether the present box image and the timer image are displayed at the same time or not at the same time.

The timer in the timer image shown in FIGS. 12-5 (C) and 12-5 (D) is a digital timer (timer that displays the remaining time by a numerical value), but is a needle type (the remaining time is displayed by the position of the needle or the like). It may be a timer of the timer). Further, it does not have to be a timer as long as it indicates the remaining time (for example, it may be an hourglass or the like). Depending on which type (digital timer, hand-type timer, hourglass, etc.) is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be different.

When displaying a plurality of timer images, they may be displayed side by side (see, for example, FIG. 12-5 (E)), or the number of timer images may be displayed without being arranged (for example, FIG. 12-5 (F)). )reference). The number of present box images may be displayed without arranging them.

(Variation example 19 of the feature portion 006SH)
In the above embodiment, the set value is suggested by the heat character effect and the eye catch effect, but the setting value is not limited to the heat character effect and the eye catch effect.

As an example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in an effect (for example, a mini character effect) performed before the reach or the period before the pseudo-continuous temporary stop. The present box effect or the like may not be executed for the setting suggestion effect (that is, the present box may not be opened and suggested that the mini character effect or the like is executed).

As another example, the set value may be suggested by the present box effect. Specifically, for example, in the present box production, in addition to the present box image of the normal mode (see FIGS. 12-5 (A) and 12-5), the present box image of the special aspect (for example, FIG. 12-5 (G)). (See (H)) can be displayed, the present box image in the normal mode suggests the execution of any notice effect, and the present box image in the special mode suggests the execution of any notice effect and the set value (or). , Setting change) may be suggested. The present box image 006SHPB2-CL of FIG. 12-5 (G) has a different display mode (pattern in this example) from the present box image 006SHPB-CL of FIG. 12-5 (A). The present box image 006SHPB2-OP of FIG. 12-5 (H) has a different display mode (pattern in this example) from the present box image 006SHPB-CL of FIG. 12-5 (B).

As another example, the set value may be suggested by the timer effect. Specifically, for example, in the timer effect, in addition to the timer image of the normal mode (see FIGS. 12-5 (C) (D)), the timer image of the special mode (for example, FIGS. 12-5 (I) (J)) (See) can be displayed, the timer image in the normal mode suggests the execution of any notice effect, and the timer image in the special mode suggests the execution of any notice effect and the set value (or setting change) is set. It may be suggested. The timer image of FIG. 12-5 (I) is different from the timer image of FIG. 12-5 (C) in the display mode (presence or absence of a bell in this example). The timer image of FIG. 12-5 (J) is different from the timer image of FIG. 12-5 (D) in the display mode (presence or absence of a bell in this example).

(Modification example 20 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the present box image (present box effect) is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 9, 12-16 and 12-17), but the lookahead advance notice setting process (see FIGS. 9, 12-16 and 12-17). The present box image may be determined in step S161). In the mode of determining the present box image in the variable display start setting process (step S171), the present box image is determined based on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-7). When determining the present box image in the reading notice setting process (step S161), the received symbol specification command (whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) The present box image may be determined based on the contents of the effect control command)) indicating the determination result and the variation category specification command (effect control command indicating the category (type) of the determined variation pattern). It should be noted that a plurality of present box images may be collectively determined in the look-ahead advance notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one present box image may be determined in the look-ahead advance notice setting process at the time of each start winning. May be good. That is, a plurality of present box images may be associated with one variation, or one present box image may be associated with each variation.

In addition, "suggestion of setting value" is only to recognize that there is a high possibility that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range), and that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range). It may not be deterministically notified, or it may be deterministically notified that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). For example, by making sure that a certain effect or a certain display is not determined when the setting is low (for example, a setting value of 3 or less), the effect or the display or the like is set to a high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or less). It will definitely notify you of the fact.

In the above description, since the display result (missing, big hit) is included in the fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern # 13 includes the fact that the super reach A is executed and also the fluctuation pattern # 13 is performed. 17 uses a variation pattern (contents of a variation pattern specification command) without using a display result (contents of a variable display result notification command, etc.) and a big hit in addition to the execution of Super Reach A). As a result, various effects (notice effect, present box effect, setting suggestion effect, etc.) are determined (for example, FIG. 12-3, FIG. 12-4, FIG. 12-7, FIG. 12-9, FIG. 12-. 10), various effects (notice effect, present box effect, setting suggestion effect, etc.) may be determined by using the display result (contents of the variable display result notification command, etc.).

(Application to other devices)
Although the example of applying to a pachinko gaming machine has been described above, it can also be applied to a slot machine. For example, in a certain state (for example, a state that is not an advantageous state), whether to shift to another state (for example, an advantageous state) periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range) is determined from the normal time. In slot machines that draw lots with a high probability, multiple types of advance notice effects with different expectations for transition to other states and specific displays (present box image, timer image, etc.) corresponding to the advance notice effects to be executed are displayed. It is possible to execute the specific effect to be displayed and execute it when the setting suggestion effect is not controlled by another state (advantageous state), and when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed. There are cases where the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the notice effect, and when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, the specific display is displayed before the execution of the notice effect. When the display mode of is changed to a special mode and the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed. The ratio of being controlled to another state (advantageous state) is higher than that of the time, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the specific display may not be displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect.

Alternatively, in the slot machine that draws with high probability whether to shift to the second advantageous state (for example, AT state, ART state, etc.) in the first advantageous state (for example, CZ, bonus game, etc.), the first In the advantageous state, it is possible to execute multiple types of advance notice effects with different expectations for transition to the second advantageous state, and specific effects that display specific displays (present box image, timer image, etc.) in response to the advance notice effects. This is possible when the setting suggestion effect is not controlled to the second advantageous state, and when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and when the notice effect is executed before the advance notice effect is executed. There are cases where the specific display corresponding to is not displayed, and when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is changed to a special mode before the advance notice effect is executed. , When the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, it is in the second advantageous state than when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the notice effect. When the rate of control is high and the setting suggestion effect is executed, the specific display may not be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect.

(Explanation of means relating to feature unit 006SH)
(Means 1 relating to feature unit 006SH)
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and the player has a disadvantage setting value and a player more than the disadvantage setting value. A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value having a high degree of advantage for the user, and an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect. , The effect executing means includes a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, the cut-in advance notice effect shown in FIG. 12-1, group advance notice effect, etc.) and a specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect (for example, FIG. The specific effect of displaying the present box image, timer image, etc. shown in 12-5 can be executed, and the setting suggestion effect related to the setting means (for example, the special eye catch shown in FIG. 12-8 (A)) can be executed. It can be executed when the effect is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, it can be executed in Ta22 to Ta23 as shown in FIGS. 12-11), and the advance notice effect is supported before the advance notice effect is executed. There are cases where the specific display is displayed and cases where the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed (for example, whether or not the present box effect shown in FIG. 12-7 is executed). (Refer to the determination ratio), when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, the display mode of the specific display is changed to a special mode before the execution of the notice effect (for example, FIG. As shown in 12-6, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP), and the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed (for example, whether or not the present box effect shown in FIG. 12-7 is executed). (Refer to the determination ratio), when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the specific display is not displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, a cut-in notice effect and a group notice). The present box is applicable to the production, pseudo-continuous advance notice effect, button advance notice effect, and character advance notice effect, but the hot character effect and eye-catching effect are not the target of the present box).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. That is, if the setting suggestion effect is included as the target of the specific display, the player presumes that the setting suggestion effect does not control the advantageous state, and the player's expectation is reduced, which makes the game more enjoyable. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, since the setting suggestion effect is not included as the target of the specific display, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means 2 pertaining to feature unit 006SH)
The gaming machine of the means 1 is not executed when it is controlled to the advantageous state, and can be executed when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the eye-catching effect shown in FIG. 12-10). Etc.) and the second setting suggestion effect (for example, the thermal character effect shown in FIG. 12-9) that can be executed both when the advantageous state is controlled and when the advantageous state is not controlled. It is possible.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects having different executable scenes, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The gaming machine of the means 1 is not executed when it is not controlled in the advantageous state, but can be executed when it is controlled in the advantageous state (for example, the definite notification illustrated in the modified example). It may be possible to execute (directing, etc.).

(Means 3 pertaining to feature unit 006SH)
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 has a plurality of types of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the thermal character effect shown in FIG. 12-9 and the eye catch shown in FIG. 12-10) having different accuracy of the suggestion regarding the setting means. (Direction, etc.) can be executed.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects having different suggestion accuracy, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 4 pertaining to feature unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 3 can execute variable display of the identification information, and include a look-ahead determination means for determining whether or not the identification information is controlled to the advantageous state, and the specific display is based on the look-ahead determination. (For example, the display of the present box image may be determined in the look-ahead advance notice setting process (step S161)).

According to the game machine, for example, a specific display can be displayed before the start of the fluctuation based on the look-ahead determination, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 5 for Feature Unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 4 can display a plurality of the specific displays (see, for example, FIGS. 12-19 (B) and 12-25 (A)), and the number of displays of the specific display is a plurality. It is easier to control the advantageous state than the singular.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to pay attention to the number of displays of the specific display and improve the interest of the game.

(Means 6 for Feature Unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 5 have a plurality of types of display modes of the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 12-5), and may make suggestions regarding the setting means according to the display mode of the specific display. ..

According to the game machine, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode of the specific display and improve the interest of the game.

(Means 7 for Feature Unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of means 1 to 6 have an execution period of the advance notice effect (for example, an execution period of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect of FIG. 12-11) and an execution period of the setting suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 12-11). When the execution period of the heat character effect of the above overlaps with the above-mentioned advance notice effect, the setting suggestion effect is preferentially executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (C), "heat" is changed to "heat". Displayed on the front side of "Re").

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage caused by overlooking the suggestion.

(Means 8 for Feature Unit 006SH)
In the gaming machines of means 1 to 7, the determination of whether to execute the setting suggestion effect and the determination of whether to execute the advance notice effect are independently performed. For example, whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by the effect determination process B (see FIG. 12-18), and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined by the effect determination process A (see FIGS. 12-15 to 12-17). Will be done.

According to the game machine, the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect can be suitably executed. It also facilitates design.

(Means 9 for Feature Unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 8 can execute the variable display of the identification information, and may be able to execute the setting suggestion effect at a plurality of timings within the variable display period of the identification information.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to pay attention to a plurality of timings and improve the interest of the game. Further, since it can be executed at a plurality of timings, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the setting suggestion effect will be executed.

(Explanation of feature section 011SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 011SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 011SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 011SH includes a game control means and an effect executing means. The game control means is realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12.

The front view and the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 011SH are the same as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH (see FIG. 11-1). However, for convenience of explanation, the movable body 027SH 32 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH is referred to as the movable body 011SH32 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 011SH.

The jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 011SH is the same as the jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 11-2 (A). .. The jackpot probability (high probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 011SH is the same as the jackpot probability (high probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 11-2 (B). ..

The type of jackpot of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 011SH (big hit type) is the same as the type of jackpot of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH (big hit type) shown in FIG. 11-2 (C). .. Further, the distribution of the jackpot type of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 011SH is the same as the distribution of the jackpot type of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D) and 11-2 (E).

FIG. 13-1 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 011SH. FIG. 13-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times). Fluctuation pattern # 10 is a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern # 11 is a non-reach out-of-reach (for shortening) fluctuation pattern. Fluctuation pattern # 12 is a fluctuation pattern that is out of normal reach. Fluctuation pattern # 13 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (weak battle) and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 14 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (medium battle) and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 15 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (strong battle) and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 16 is a fluctuation pattern of small hits. Fluctuation pattern # 17 is a fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot. Fluctuation pattern # 18 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (weak battle) and finally becomes a big hit. Fluctuation pattern # 19 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (medium battle) and finally becomes a big hit. Fluctuation pattern # 20 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (strong battle) and finally becomes a big hit.

FIG. 13-1 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-1 (B), the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is super reach (strong battle)> super reach (medium battle)> super reach (weak battle)> normal reach. The expected degree of jackpot of a certain effect a is, for example, (probability that effect a is executed when a jackpot is reached) × (probability of being a jackpot) / {(probability that effect a is executed when a jackpot is achieved) It is calculated by × (probability of becoming a big hit) + (probability that production a is executed when it does not become a big hit) × (probability of not becoming a big hit)} (when the expected degree of big hit becomes "1", it is always "big hit" "become).

For example, the reliability of super reach (weak battle) (when the setting value is 1) is (0.1 × 1/320) / {(0.1 × 1/320) + (0.008) in the low base state. × 319/320)} = about 3.8%. In addition, the reliability of super reach (weak battle) (when the setting value is 1) is (0.1 × 1/320) / {(0.1 × 1/320) + (0.004) in the high base state. × 319/320)} = about 7.3%.

The reliability of super reach (medium battle) (when the setting value is 1) is (0.25 x 1/320) / {(0.25 x 1/320) + (0.001 x 319) in the low base state. / 320)} = about 44%. The reliability of super reach (medium battle) (when the setting value is 1) is (0.25 × 1/320) / {(0.25 × 1/320) + (0.004) in the high base state. × 319/320)} = about 16%.

The reliability of super reach (strong battle) (when the setting value is 1) is (0.6 x 1/320) / {(0.6 x 1/320) + (0.001 x 319) in the low base state. / 320)} = about 65%. In addition, the reliability of super reach (strong battle) (when the setting value is 1) is (0.6 × 1/320) / {(0.6 × 1/320) + (0.002) in the high base state. × 319/320)} = about 48%.

According to the example of FIG. 13-1 (B), if the reliability of super reach (weak battle), super reach (medium battle), and super reach (strong battle) is different between the low base state and the high base state. However, like Super Reach A and Super Reach B in the feature section 027SH (see Fig. 11-3 (B)), Super Reach (weak battle), Super Reach (medium battle), Super Reach (strong battle) The reliability may be common between the low base state and the high base state.

Further, according to the example of FIG. 13-1 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 11 is not determined during the low base, but for example, the fluctuation pattern # 11 is determined even during the low base according to the number of reserved memories. It may be. Further, according to the example of FIG. 13-1 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 10 is not determined during the high base, but the fluctuation pattern # 10 is determined even during the high base, for example, according to the number of reserved memories. It may be.

FIG. 13-2 is an example of the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect). In this embodiment, the pseudo-ream notice effect is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determined after the fluctuation pattern is determined (pseudo-reamless or pseudo-repeated (1 time, 2 times, 3 times)). (Determine). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-2, in the case of non-reach (that is, fluctuation patterns # 10 and # 11), pseudo-continuousity is determined at a rate of 100%. In the case of a small hit (that is, fluctuation pattern # 16), the pseudo-continuousness is determined at a rate of 100%. In the case of normal reach (that is, fluctuation patterns # 12, # 17), pseudo-ream is determined at a rate of 80%, and pseudo-reach (one pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of super reach (weak battle) (that is, fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 18), the pseudo-ream is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pseudo-reach (1 pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 40%. Pseudo-repeated (two pseudo-reams) is determined at a rate of 30%. In the case of super reach (medium battle) (that is, fluctuation patterns # 14 and # 19), the pseudo-ream is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pseudo-reach (1 pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 30%. Pseudo-repeated (two pseudo-reams) is determined at a rate of 30%, and pseudo-sequential (three pseudo-reams) is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of super reach (strong battle) (that is, fluctuation patterns # 15 and # 20), the pseudo-ream is determined at a rate of 10%, and the pseudo-reach (1 pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 20%. Pseudo-repeated (two pseudo-reams) is determined at a rate of 30%, and pseudo-sequential (three pseudo-reams) is determined at a rate of 40%.

According to the example of FIG. 13-2, the degree of expectation for the player is higher when the pseudo-ream is performed than when it is not performed, and when the number of pseudo-reams is large, it is higher than when it is not performed. Become. For example, in the case of 1 pseudo-ream, normal reach or higher is confirmed, in the case of 2 pseudo-ream, super reach (weak battle) or higher is confirmed, and in the case of 3 pseudo-ream, super reach (medium battle). The above is confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 13-2, in the case of a small hit (variation pattern # 16), the pseudo-continuous is determined at a rate of 100%, but in the case of a small hit, the pseudo-continuous is also determined. You may do so. Further, according to FIG. 13-1 (A), the special figure fluctuation time of the small hit (variation pattern # 16) is 15 seconds, but the case where the pseudo continuous possession is determined even in the case of the small hit. The special figure fluctuation time of the small hit (fluctuation pattern # 16) may be lengthened (for example, in the case of a small hit, if the number of pseudo-continuous hits is at most one, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach is set to be about the same. If two or more pseudo-reams are allowed, it may be about the same as the special figure fluctuation time of Super Reach).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 011SH executes a battle effect (a battle effect of any of a weak battle, a medium battle, and a strong battle) in the super reach (see FIG. 13-1 (A)). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of battle production production patterns (battle production production patterns) are prepared. Each of the multiple types of battle effects can be identified by the battle effect pattern.

13-3 and 13-4 are explanatory views for explaining the battle effect. FIG. 13-5 is a production example of each scene of the battle production. FIG. 13-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the determination ratio of the battle effect.

The "weak title" in the "content" column of FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4 is an effect of displaying a title suggesting the start of a weak battle. For example, a weak title image 011SHJT as shown in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed. In the weak title image 011SHJT shown in FIG. 13-5 (A), the opponent of the battle is character A (a strong enemy who appears as an opponent of the weak battle), and the expectation of victory is one star (competition). Since the opponent is a strong enemy, the expectation of victory is relatively low).

The "medium title" is a production that displays a title that suggests the start of a medium battle. For example, the medium title image 011SHTT as shown in FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed. In the middle title image 011SHTT shown in FIG. 13-5 (B), the fact that the opponent of the battle is character B (the middle enemy who appears as the opponent of the middle battle) and the degree of expectation of victory is two stars ( Since the opponent is a medium enemy, the expectation for victory is medium).

The "strong title" is an effect of displaying a title suggesting the start of a strong battle. For example, a strong title image 011SHKT as shown in FIG. 13-5 (C) is displayed. In the strong title image 011SHKT shown in FIG. 13-5 (C), the battle opponent is character C (a weak enemy who appears as an opponent in a strong battle), and the victory expectation is 3 stars ( Since the opponent is a weak enemy, the expectation of victory is relatively high).

"Weak battle start" is a production that notifies the start of a weak battle. For example, the weak battle start image 011SHJBS as shown in FIG. 13-5 (D) is displayed. In the weak battle start image 011SHJBS shown in FIG. 13-5 (D), it is shown that the battle with the character A (a strong enemy appearing as an opponent of the weak battle) is started.

"Start of medium battle" is a production that notifies the start of medium battle. For example, the middle battle start image 011SHTBS as shown in FIG. 13-5 (E) is displayed. In the medium battle start image 011SHTBS shown in FIG. 13-5 (E), it is shown that a battle with character B (a medium enemy appearing as an opponent of the medium battle) is started.

"Strong battle start" is a production that notifies the start of a strong battle. For example, the strong battle start image 011SHKBS as shown in FIG. 13-5 (F) is displayed. In the strong battle start image 011SHKBS shown in FIG. 13-5 (F), it is shown that a battle with character C (a weak enemy appearing as an opponent of a strong battle) is started.

"With accessory movement" is an effect of operating the movable body 011SH32. For example, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G), the movable body 011SH32 is operated.

"Battle (defeat)" is a production that notifies the defeat as a result of the battle. For example, the LOSE image 011SHKH1 as shown in FIG. 13-5 (H) is displayed.

"Battle (win)" is a production that notifies the victory as a result of the battle. For example, the WIN image 011SHKH2 as shown in FIG. 13-5 (I) is displayed.

"Relief (win)" is a relief effect (sometimes referred to simply as "relief") that is executed after notifying the defeat as a result of the battle. For example, a relief effect as shown in FIG. 13-5 (J) is executed.

FIG. 13-3 (A) shows the content of the battle effect in the out-of-super reach (weak battle) (that is, the fluctuation pattern # 13). In the out-of-super reach (weak battle), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1" or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L2" is executed.

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1" is a battle production with a production mode such as weak title → weak battle start → character movement available → battle (defeat). is there. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed), followed by The start of the weak battle is notified (for example, the weak battle start image 011SHJBS shown in FIG. 13-5 (D) is displayed), and the movable body 011SH32 operates as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G) during the weak battle. As a result of the battle, the defeat is notified (for example, the LOSE image 011SHKH1 shown in FIG. 13-5 (H) is displayed).

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L2" is a battle production of a production mode such as weak title → weak battle start → battle (defeat). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L2" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-J-L2", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

In addition, in the out-of-super reach (weak battle) (variation pattern # 13), it is explained that the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1" or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L2" is executed. However, specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (A), for example, the battle effect pattern "BP-J-L1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle effect pattern "BP-J-L2" is determined. Is determined at a rate of 80%, and one of the determined items is executed.

FIG. 13-3 (B) shows the content of the battle effect in the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (that is, the fluctuation pattern # 18). In the super reach (weak battle) jackpot, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W2", or the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3" ”, Or the battle production of the battle production pattern“ BP-J-W4 ”.

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1" is a battle production with a production mode such as weak title → weak battle start → character movement available → battle (win). is there. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed), followed by The start of the weak battle is notified (for example, the weak battle start image 011SHJBS shown in FIG. 13-5 (D) is displayed), and the movable body 011SH32 operates as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G) during the weak battle. As a result of the battle, victory is notified (WIN image 011SHKH2 of FIG. 13-5 (I) is displayed).

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W2" is a battle production of a production mode such as weak title → weak battle start → battle (win). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W2" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1". The difference is that the movement of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W2".

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3" is as follows: weak title → weak battle start → character movement available → battle (loss) → relief (win) It is a battle production of the mode. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed), followed by The start of the weak battle is notified (for example, the weak battle start image 011SHJBS shown in FIG. 13-5 (D) is displayed), and the movable body 011SH32 operates as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G) during the weak battle. As a result of the battle, the defeat is notified (for example, the LOSE image 011SHKH1 of FIG. 13-5 (H) is displayed), and subsequently, the relief effect is executed as shown in FIG. 13-5 (J).

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W4" is a battle production with a production mode such as weak title → weak battle start → battle (loss) → relief (win). is there. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W4" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-J-W4", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

In the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (variable pattern # 18), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1" or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W2" or the battle. It has been explained that the battle production of the production pattern "BP-J-W3" or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W4" is executed. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 13-6 (A). As shown, the battle effect pattern "BP-J-W1" is determined at a rate of 40%, the battle effect pattern "BP-J-W2" is determined at a rate of 30%, and the battle effect pattern "BP-J-" is determined. "W3" is determined at a rate of 20%, the battle effect pattern "BP-J-W4" is determined at a rate of 10%, and one of the determined items is executed.

FIG. 13-3 (C) shows the content of the battle effect in the out-of-super reach (medium battle) (that is, the fluctuation pattern # 14). In the out-of-super reach (medium battle), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2", or the battle production pattern "BP-T-L3" ”, Or the battle production of the battle production pattern“ BP-T-L4 ”.

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (C), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1" has a production mode such as weak title → medium title → medium battle start → character movement available → battle (loss). It is a battle production. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed), followed by A title suggesting the start of the middle battle is displayed (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed), and then the start of the middle battle is notified (for example, in FIG. 13-5 (E)). The middle battle start image 011SHTBS is displayed), and during the middle battle, the movable body 011SH32 operates as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G), and the defeat is notified as a result of the battle (for example, in FIG. 13-5 (H)). LOSE image 011SHKH1 is displayed).

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (C), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" is a battle production with a production mode such as medium title → medium battle start → character movement available → battle (loss). is there. In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" are weak titles in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1". The difference is that the weak titles are not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-TL2", while the display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (C), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-TL3" is a battle production of a production mode such as weak title → medium title → medium battle start → battle (loss). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L3" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-TL3", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (C), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L4" is a battle production in a production mode such as medium title → medium battle start → battle (loss). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L4" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L4", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

In addition, in the out-of-super reach (medium battle) (variation pattern # 14), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1" or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" or the battle. It has been explained that the battle production of the production pattern "BP-T-L3" or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L4" is executed. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 13-6 (B). As shown, the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L1" is determined at a rate of 10%, the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L2" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle effect pattern "BP-T-" is determined. "L3" is determined at a rate of 30%, the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L4" is determined at a rate of 40%, and one of the determined items is executed.

FIG. 13-3 (D) shows the content of the battle effect in the super reach (medium battle) jackpot (that is, the fluctuation pattern # 19). In the super reach (medium battle) jackpot, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2", or the battle production pattern "BP-T-W3" , Or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W4", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5", or the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6". The battle production, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W7", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W8" is executed.

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1" has a production mode such as weak title → medium title → medium battle start → character movement available → battle (win). It is a battle production. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed), followed by A title suggesting the start of the middle battle is displayed (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed), and the operation of the movable body 011SH32 as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G) during the middle battle. As a result of the battle, the victory is notified (WIN image 011SHKH2 of FIG. 13-5 (I) is displayed).

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2" is a battle production with a production mode such as medium title → medium battle start → character movement available → battle (win). is there. In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2" are weak titles in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1". The difference is that the weak titles are not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2", while the display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W3" is a battle production of a production mode such as weak title → medium title → medium battle start → battle (win). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W3" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W3", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W4" is a battle production in a production mode such as middle title → middle battle start → battle (win). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W4" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W4", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5" is as follows: weak title → medium title → medium battle start → character movement available → battle (loss) → relief (win) ) Is a battle production. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed), followed by A title suggesting the start of the middle battle is displayed (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed), and the operation of the movable body 011SH32 as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G) during the middle battle. As a result of the battle, the defeat is notified (for example, the LOSE image 011SHKH1 of FIG. 13-5 (H) is displayed), and then the relief effect is executed as shown in FIG. 13-5 (J).

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6" is as follows: medium title → medium battle start → character movement available → battle (loss) → relief (win) It is a battle production of the mode. In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6" are weak titles in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5". While the display is performed, the weak title is not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6".

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W7" has a production mode such as weak title → medium title → medium battle start → battle (loss) → relief (win). It is a battle production. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W7" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W7", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W8" is a battle production with a production mode such as medium title → medium battle start → battle (loss) → relief (win). is there. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W8" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W8", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

In the super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variable pattern # 19), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1" or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2" or the battle. Battle production of the production pattern "BP-T-W3", battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W4", battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5", or battle production pattern It was explained that the battle production of "BP-T-W6", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W7", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W8" will be executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (B), the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W2" is 20%. The battle production pattern "BP-T-W3" is determined at a ratio of 15%, the battle production pattern "BP-T-W4" is determined at a ratio of 15%, and the battle production pattern "BP-" is determined. "T-W5" is determined at a rate of 10%, battle production pattern "BP-T-W6" is determined at a rate of 10%, and battle production pattern "BP-T-W7" is determined at a rate of 5%. , The battle production pattern "BP-T-W8" is determined at a rate of 5%, and one of the determined is executed.

FIG. 13-4 (A) shows the content of the battle effect in the out-of-super reach (strong battle) (that is, the fluctuation pattern # 15). In the out-of-super reach (strong battle), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2", or the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3" , Or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L4", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L5", or the battle production pattern "BP-K-L6". Perform a battle production.

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1" is as follows: weak title → medium title → strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (loss) It is a battle production of the production mode. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed), followed by A title suggesting the start of a medium battle is displayed (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed), and then a title suggesting the start of a strong battle is displayed (for example, FIG. 13-5). The strong title image 011SHKT of (C) is displayed), and then the start of the strong battle is notified (for example, the strong battle start image 011SHKBS of FIG. 13-5 (F) is displayed), and FIG. 13- during the strong battle. As shown in 5 (G), there is an operation of the movable body 011SH32, and as a result of the battle, the defeat is notified (for example, the LOSE image 011SHKH1 of FIG. 13-5 (H) is displayed).

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2" has a production mode such as medium title → strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (defeat). It is a battle production. In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2" are weak titles in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1". While the display is performed, the weak title is not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2".

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3" is a battle production with a production mode such as strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (loss). is there. In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3" are the middle titles in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2". The difference is that the middle title is not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3", while the display is performed.

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L4" is a battle production of a production mode such as weak title → medium title → strong title → strong battle start → battle (loss). Is. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L4" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L4", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 13-4 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L5" is a battle production of a production mode such as medium title → strong title → strong battle start → battle (defeat). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L5" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L5", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 13-4 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L6" is a battle production in a production mode such as strong title → strong battle start → battle (defeat). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L6" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L6", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

In addition, in the out-of-super reach (strong battle) (variation pattern # 15), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1" or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2" or the battle. Battle production of production pattern "BP-K-L3", battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-L4", battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-L5", or battle production pattern It has been explained that the battle effect of "BP-K-L6" is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (C), the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L1" is 5%. Determined by the ratio, the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2" is determined at a ratio of 10%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3" is determined at a ratio of 15%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K" is determined. -L4 "is determined at a rate of 15%, the battle effect pattern" BP-K-L5 "is determined at a rate of 25%, and the battle effect pattern" BP-K-L6 "is determined at a rate of 30%. Do one of the decisions you made.

FIG. 13-4 (B) shows the content of the battle effect in the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (that is, the fluctuation pattern # 20). In the super reach (strong battle) jackpot, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2", or the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3" , Or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W5", or the battle production pattern "BP-K-W6". Battle production, battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-W7", battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-W8", or battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-W9" Or, perform the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W10", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W11", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W12". To do.

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1" is as follows: weak title → medium title → strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (win) It is a battle production of the production mode. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed), followed by A title suggesting the start of a medium battle is displayed (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed), and then a title suggesting the start of a strong battle is displayed (for example, FIG. 13-5). The strong title image 011SHKT of (C) is displayed), and during the strong battle, the movable body 011SH32 operates as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G), and the victory is notified as a result of the battle (FIG. 13-5 (I)). WIN image 011SHKH2 is displayed).

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" has a production mode such as medium title → strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (win). It is a battle production. In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" are weak titles in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1". The difference is that the weak titles are not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2", while the display is performed.

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3" is a battle production with a production mode such as strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (win). is there. In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3" are the middle titles in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2". The difference is that the middle title is not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3" while the display is performed.

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4" is a battle production of a production mode such as weak title → medium title → strong title → strong battle start → battle (win). Is. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1". The difference is that the movement of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4".

As shown in FIG. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W5" is a battle production of a production mode such as medium title → strong title → strong battle start → battle (win). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W5" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W5", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W6" is a battle production in a production mode such as strong title → strong battle start → battle (win). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W6" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W6", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7" is as follows: weak title → medium title → strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (defeat) → It is a battle production in a production mode such as relief (win). That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed), followed by A title suggesting the start of a medium battle is displayed (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed), and then a title suggesting the start of a strong battle is displayed (for example, FIG. 13-5). The strong title image 011SHKT of (C) is displayed), and during the strong battle, the movable body 011SH32 operates as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G), and the defeat is notified as a result of the battle (for example, FIG. 13-5 (for example, FIG. 13-5 (G)). The LOSE image 011SHKH1 of H) is displayed), and then the relief effect is executed as shown in FIG. 13-5 (J).

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8" is as follows: medium title → strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (loss) → relief (win) ) Is a battle production. In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8" are weak titles in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7". While the display is performed, the weak title is not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8".

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W9" is as follows: strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (loss) → relief (win) It is a battle production of the mode. In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W9" are the middle titles in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8". The difference is that the middle title is not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W9" while the display is performed.

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W10" is as follows: weak title → medium title → strong title → strong battle start → battle (loss) → relief (win). It is a battle production of the production mode. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W10" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W10", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W11" has a production mode such as medium title → strong title → strong battle start → battle (loss) → relief (win). It is a battle production. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W11" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W11", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W12" is a battle production with a production mode such as strong title → strong battle start → battle (loss) → relief (win). is there. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W9" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W12" are the movable body 011SH32 in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W9". However, in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W12", the operation of the movable body 011SH32 is not performed.

In addition, in the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (variable pattern # 20), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2", or the battle. Battle production of the production pattern "BP-K-W3", battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4", battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W5", or battle production pattern Battle production of "BP-K-W6", battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-W7", battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-W8", or battle production pattern "BP" -K-W9 "battle production, or battle production pattern" BP-K-W10 "battle production, or battle production pattern" BP-K-W11 "battle production, or battle production pattern" BP-K It was explained that the battle effect of "-W12" is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (C), the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W1" is determined at a rate of 15%. , The battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" is determined at a rate of 15%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3" is determined at a rate of 15%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4" is determined. Determined at a rate of 9%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W5" is determined at a rate of 8%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W6" is determined at a rate of 8%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W6" is determined. "BP-K-W7" is determined at a rate of 6%, battle production pattern "BP-K-W8" is determined at a rate of 6%, and battle production pattern "BP-K-W9" is determined at a rate of 6%. Determined, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W10" is determined at a rate of 4%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W11" is determined at a rate of 4%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W12" is determined. Is determined at a rate of 4%, and one of the determined items is executed.

According to FIG. 13-6 (A), in the out-of-super reach (weak battle) (variation pattern # 13), the battle production (“BP-J-L2”) that does not include “with character movement” is better. It is determined at a higher rate than the battle production ("BP-J-L1") including "with character movement". On the other hand, in the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 18), the battle production ("BP-J-W1", "BP-J-W3") including "character movement" is the "role". It is determined at a higher rate than the battle effects (“BP-J-W2”, “BP-J-W4”) that do not include “with motion”. Therefore, the winning expectation (expectation to be a big hit) is higher when the movable body 011SH32 is operated during the weak battle than when the movable body 011SH32 is not operated during the weak battle.

Similarly, according to FIG. 13-6 (B), the degree of expectation of victory (big hit) when the movable body 011SH32 is operated during the middle battle is higher than when the movable body 011SH32 is not operated during the middle battle. Expectation) is high. Further, according to FIG. 13-6 (C), the degree of expectation of victory (expected to be a big hit) is higher when the movable body 011SH32 is operated during the strong battle than when the movable body 011SH32 is not operated during the strong battle. Degree) is high.

Further, according to FIG. 13-6 (B), in the out-of-super reach (medium battle) (variation pattern # 14), the battle effects (BP-T-L2, BP-T-L4) that do not include the "weak title" are included. Is determined at a higher rate than the battle effects (BP-T-L1, BP-T-L3) including the "weak title". On the other hand, in the super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 19), the battle production including "weak title" (BP-T-W1, BP-T-W3, BP-T-W5, BP-T-W7) The decision ratio is not different between the battle effect (BP-T-W2, BP-T-W4, BP-T-W6, BP-T-W8) that does not include the "weak title". Therefore, when the start of the medium battle is suggested after the start of the weak battle is suggested and the medium battle is started (so-called when the weak battle is changed to the medium battle), the start of the medium battle is started from the beginning. The expectation for victory (expectation for a big hit) is higher than when the middle battle is started as suggested.

Similarly, according to FIG. 13-6 (C), when the start of the medium battle is suggested after the start of the weak battle is suggested, and the start of the strong battle is further suggested and the strong battle is started (weak battle). , Medium battle, strong battle), when the start of strong battle is suggested and the strong battle is started after the start of medium battle is suggested (when it becomes medium battle, strong battle) The expectation for victory (expectation for a big hit) is higher than that. Also, when the start of a strong battle is suggested and the strong battle is started after the start of the medium battle is suggested (when the medium battle and the strong battle are established), the start of the strong battle is suggested from the beginning. The expectation for victory (expectation for a big hit) is higher than when a strong battle is started.

Further, according to FIG. 13-6 (A), in the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 18), the battle production (“BP-J-W1”, “BP”) that does not include “relief (win)” is included. -J-W2 ") is determined at a higher rate than the battle production ("BP-J-W3", "BP-J-W4") including "relief (win)". Therefore, when winning in a weak battle, the frequency of winning without relief is higher than the frequency of winning through relief.

Similarly, according to FIG. 13-6 (B), when winning in a medium battle, the frequency of winning without relief is higher than the frequency of winning through relief. Further, according to FIG. 13-6 (C), when winning in a strong battle, the frequency of winning without relief is higher than the frequency of winning through relief.

FIG. 13-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the item image effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 011SH can execute an item image effect for displaying an item image.

As the item image displayed in the item image effect, an up-card image 011SHUPC as shown in FIG. 13-7 (A) and a cancel card image 011SHPXLC as shown in FIG. 13-7 (B) are prepared.

Up cards (similar to cancellation cards) are not always acquired (acquired), but may or may not be acquired for each change. The acquired up card (same as the cancellation card) is displayed (stocked and displayed) on the screen and used later.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (C), the up card acquisition timing (that is, the stock timing) is immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach. The up card is used at the time of re-variation in the case of pseudo-continuous possession, and at the time of the rise of the battle.

When the up card is used at the time of re-variation in the case of pseudo-continuous possession, the movement when the up card is used is that the up card acts on the temporary stop symbol (the stop symbol is changed to the pseudo-continuous symbol (re-variation symbol)). (Change)), and as a result, it is changed again (see FIGS. 13-9 (H4) to 13-9 (L4)). When the up card has a battle rise and is used at the time of the rise, the movement when using the up card is that the up card acts on the title ("weak title" or "medium title") (the title is the upper battle). (Change) to the thing, and as a result, the battle effect is completed (see FIGS. 13-11 (C3) to 13-11 (F3)). The method of determining whether or not to acquire the up card, the acquisition timing, the usage scene, etc. will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (C), the cancellation card acquisition timing (that is, the stocking timing) is immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach. The cancellation card is used at the time of re-variation in the case of pseudo-consecutive possession, at the time of the rise of the battle with the rise, and at the time of relief with the relief.

When the cancel card is used at the time of re-variation in the case of pseudo-continuous possession, the movement when using the cancel card is that the cancel card acts on the temporary stop symbol (cancels the stop of the symbol), and as a result, it re-variates. (See FIGS. 13-9 (H5) to 13-9 (L5)). When the cancel card has a battle rise and is used at the start, the movement when using the cancel card is that the cancel card acts on the title ("weak title" or "medium title") (cancels the title). As a result, the battle effect is completed (see FIGS. 13-11 (C4) to 13-11 (F4)). When the cancellation card is used for relief when there is relief, the movement when using the cancellation card acts on the result of the battle (cancels the result of defeat), and as a result, the relief effect is executed. (See FIGS. 13-12 (C2) to 13-12 (G2)). The method of determining whether or not to acquire the cancellation card, the acquisition timing, the usage scene, etc. will be described later.

FIG. 13-8 is an example of an effect operation related to the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect. In FIG. 13-8, an example of the effect operation is described for three types of flows. First, FIG. 13-8 (A) → FIG. 13-8 (B) → FIG. 13-8 (C) → FIG. 13-8 (D) → FIG. 13-8 (E1) → FIG. 13-8 ( The flow of F1) is an example of an effect operation in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and fanned, but the pseudo-continuous symbol does not stop and is out of alignment. Secondly, FIG. 13-8 (A) → FIG. 13-8 (B) → FIG. 13-8 (C) → FIG. 13-8 (D) → FIG. 13-8 (E2) → FIG. 13-8 ( The flow of F2) is an example of an effect operation in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and fanned, but the pseudo-continuous symbol does not stop and develops into a super reach. Thirdly, FIG. 13-8 (A) → FIG. 13-8 (B) → FIG. 13-8 (C) → FIG. 13-8 (D) → FIG. 13-8 (E3) → FIG. 13-8 ( The flow of F3) is an example of an effect operation in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped.

FIG. 13-8 (A) is a scene immediately before the reach of the symbol “7”. FIG. 13-8 (B) is a scene in which the symbol “7” is reached. FIG. 13-8 (C) is a scene immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” is stopped in the middle symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped. FIG. 13-8 (D) is a scene in which the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” is stopped or the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and fanned in the middle symbol.

FIG. 13-8 (E1) is a scene following FIG. 13-8 (D), and is a scene immediately before the symbol “6” is stopped as the middle symbol. FIG. 13-8 (F1) is a scene in which the symbol “6” is stopped as the middle symbol. In other words, it is a scene that is out of normal reach. However, the scene of FIG. 13-8 (F1) appears not only in the scene where the normal reach is lost, but also in the scene where the item is used (see FIG. 13-9).

FIG. 13-8 (E2) is another scene following FIG. 13-8 (D), in which the stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” was denied as the middle symbol (the stop of the symbol “6” was also denied). It is a scene. FIG. 13-8 (F2) is a scene in which the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed and develops into super reach.

FIG. 13-8 (E3) is another scene following FIG. 13-8 (D), and is a scene immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” is stopped as the middle symbol. FIG. 13-8 (F3) is a scene in which the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” is stopped as the middle symbol. That is, although the illustration is omitted, the revariable display is performed following FIG. 13-8 (F3).

FIG. 13-9 is an example of an effect operation related to the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect. In FIG. 13-9, as a scene following FIG. 13-8 (F1), an example of the effect operation is described for two types of flows. First, following FIG. 13-8 (F1), FIG. 13-9 (G4) → FIG. 13-9 (H4) → FIG. 13-9 (I4) → FIG. 13-9 (J4) → FIG. 13- The flow from 9 (K4) to FIG. 13-9 (L4) is an example of the effect operation when the up card is used and the fluctuation occurs again. Secondly, following FIG. 13-8 (F1), FIG. 13-9 (G5) → FIG. 13-9 (H5) → FIG. 13-9 (I5) → FIG. 13-9 (J5) → FIG. 13- The flow from 9 (K5) to FIG. 13-9 (L5) is an example of an effect operation when a cancel card is used and the fluctuation occurs again.

FIG. 13-9 (G4) is a scene following FIG. 13-8 (F1), and is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting that the up card is activated (used) is displayed. In addition, when it does not follow FIG. 13-9 (G4) (when the normal reach is lost), the middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) definitely stops, but it is shown in FIG. 13-9 (G4). In the following case (when the up card is used later), the middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) does not stop deterministically (for example, it shakes slightly). That is, the middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) when following FIG. 13-9 (G4) is a temporary stop symbol.

FIG. 13-9 (H4) is a scene in which the up card is notified that it will be used. Specifically, the up-card image 011SHUPC is displayed large in the center of the screen. Although details will be described later, the up card may be used after it has been acquired (stocked) (that is, the stocked up card may be used), or it may be used even though it has not been acquired (stocked). In some cases (used when there is no stock of upcards).

FIG. 13-9 (I4) is a scene in which the up card acts on the symbol “6” which is the temporary stop symbol. Specifically, the upcard image 011SHUPC is superimposed and displayed on the symbol "6" which is a temporary stop symbol. FIG. 13-9 (J4) is a scene in which the symbol “6” on which the up card acts has started to move. FIG. 13-9 (K4) is a scene immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” stops. FIG. 13-9 (L4) is a scene in which the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” has stopped. That is, in FIGS. 13-9 (H4) to 13-9 (L4), the scene in which the up card acts on the temporary stop symbol "6" (the scene in which the stop symbol "6" is upgraded to the pseudo-continuous symbol "re"). Is. Although not shown, the revariable display is performed following FIG. 13-9 (L4).

FIG. 13-9 (G5) is another scene following FIG. 13-8 (F1), in which the activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting that the cancellation card is activated (used) is displayed. Note that the middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) in the case of not following FIG. 13-9 (G5) (when the normal reach is lost) is definitively stopped, but in FIG. 13-9 (G5). In the following case (when the cancellation card is used later), the middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) does not stop deterministically (for example, it is slightly shaken). That is, the middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) when following FIG. 13-9 (G5) is a temporary stop symbol.

FIG. 13-9 (H5) is a scene in which the cancellation card is notified that it will be used. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHPXLC is displayed large in the center of the screen. Although details will be described later, the cancellation card may be used after being acquired (stocked) (that is, when the stocked cancellation card is used), or it may be used even though it has not been acquired (stocked). In some cases (used when there is no stock of cancellation card).

FIG. 13-9 (I5) is a scene in which the cancel card acts on the symbol “6” which is the temporary stop symbol. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHCXLC is superimposed and displayed on the symbol "6" which is a temporary stop symbol. FIG. 13-9 (J5) is a scene immediately before the symbol “6” on which the cancel card acts is canceled (destroyed, etc.). FIG. 13-9 (K5) is a scene in which the symbol “6” is canceled (destroyed, etc.). FIG. 13-9 (L5) is a scene in which the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” is displayed in place of the canceled (destroyed, etc.) symbol “6”. That is, in FIGS. 13-9 (H5) to 13-9 (L5), the scene in which the cancel card acts on the temporary stop symbol "6" (the stop of the symbol "6" is canceled and the pseudo-continuous symbol "re" is displayed. It is a scene that was replaced). Although not shown, the revariable display is performed following FIG. 13-9 (L5).

The execution mode of the pseudo-continuous fanning effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the reach symbol (symbol "7" in the examples of FIGS. 13-8 and 13-9) and the symbol immediately before the reach symbol (the symbol "7") and the symbol immediately before the reach symbol (the symbol "7") In the example of FIGS. 13-8 and 13-9, the pseudo-continuous symbol "re" is inserted between the symbols "6") to execute the pseudo-continuous fanning effect. Therefore, for example, when the reach symbol is "3", the pseudo-continuous symbol "re" is inserted between the reach symbol "3" and the symbol "2" immediately before the reach symbol to produce a pseudo-continuous fanning effect (for example). , In the scene of FIG. 13-8 (D), an effect of inciting whether the middle symbol becomes the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” or the symbol “2”) is executed.

FIG. 13-10 is an example of an effect operation related to the title display of the battle effect. In FIG. 13-10, an example of the effect operation is described for the two flows. First, the flow of FIG. 13-10 (A) → FIG. 13-10 (B1) is an example of an effect operation when a weak battle is started. Secondly, the flow of FIG. 13-10 (A) → FIG. 13-10 (B2) → FIG. 13-10 (C2) is an example of the effect operation when the middle battle is started.

FIG. 13-10 (A) is a scene in which the weak title image 011SHJT is displayed. FIG. 13-10 (B1) is a scene following FIG. 13-10 (A), and is a scene in which the weak battle start image 011SHJBS is displayed. Although not shown, a weak battle with the character A will be performed following FIG. 13-10 (B1).

FIG. 13-10 (B2) is another scene following FIG. 13-10 (A), and is a scene in which the middle title image 011SHTT is displayed. FIG. 13-10 (C2) is a scene in which the middle battle start image 011SHTBS is displayed. Although not shown, a medium battle with the character B will be performed following FIG. 13-10 (C2). That is, the flow of FIG. 13-10 (A) → FIG. 13-10 (B2) → FIG. 13-10 (C2) represents a scene in which a weak battle is changed to a medium battle.

FIG. 13-11 is an example of an effect operation related to the title display of the battle effect. In FIG. 13-11, as a scene following FIG. 13-10 (A), an example of the effect operation is described for two types of flows. First, following FIG. 13-10 (A), FIG. 13-11 (B3) → FIG. 13-11 (C3) → FIG. 13-11 (D3) → FIG. 13-11 (E3) → FIG. 13- The flow from 11 (F3) to FIG. 13-11 (G3) is an example of an effect operation when an up card is used and a weak battle is changed to a medium battle. Secondly, following FIG. 13-10 (A), FIG. 13-11 (B4) → FIG. 13-11 (C4) → FIG. 13-11 (D4) → FIG. 13-11 (E4) → FIG. 13- The flow from 11 (F4) to FIG. 13-11 (G4) is an example of an effect operation when a cancel card is used and the battle changes from a weak battle to a medium battle.

FIG. 13-11 (B3) is another scene following FIG. 13-10 (A), and is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting that the up card is activated (used) is displayed. FIG. 13-11 (C3) is a scene in which the up card is notified that it will be used. Specifically, the up-card image 011SHUPC is displayed large in the center of the screen.

FIG. 13-11 (D3) shows a scene in which the up card acts on a weak title. Specifically, the upcard image 011SHUPC is superimposed on the weak title image 011SHJT.

FIG. 13-11 (E3) is a scene in which the weak title on which the up card acts has changed. Specifically, the weak title image 011SHJTT is displayed instead of the weak title image 011SHJTT. The weak and medium title image 011SHJTT is a title image between the weak title image 011SHJT and the medium title image 011SHTT (on the way from the weak title image 011SHJT to the medium title image 011SHTT). That is, the weak title image 011SHJT indicates that the opponent of the battle is character A and the expectation of victory is one star, and the medium title image 011SHJT indicates that the opponent of the battle is character B. The victory expectation is displayed to be two stars, but the weak title image 011SHJTT displays that the opponent of the battle is character A and the victory expectation is two stars.

Note that FIG. 13-11 (E3) shows an example in which the weak and medium title image 011SHJTT between the weak title image 011SHJT and the medium title image 011SHTT is displayed when the up card acts on the weak title. When the up card acts on the medium title, the medium strong title image 011SHTKT (see FIG. 13-30 (F)) between the medium title image 011SHTT and the strong title image 011SHKT is displayed. That is, the medium title image 011SHTT indicates that the opponent of the battle is character B and the expectation of victory is two stars, and the strong title image 011SHKT indicates that the opponent of the battle is character C. The victory expectation is displayed to be 3 stars, but the medium-strength title image 011SHTKT displays that the opponent of the battle is character B and the victory expectation is 3 stars.

FIG. 13-11 (F3) is a scene in which the middle title is displayed. Specifically, the medium title image 011SHJTT is displayed instead of the weak medium title image 011SHJTT. FIG. 13-11 (G3) is a scene in which the middle battle start image 011SHTBS is displayed. Although not shown, a medium battle with the character B will be performed following FIG. 13-11 (G3). That is, FIG. 13-10 (A) → FIG. 13-11 (B3) → FIG. 13-11 (C3) → FIG. 13-11 (D3) → FIG. 13-11 (E3) → FIG. 13-11 (F3) → The flow of FIG. 13-11 (G3) shows a scene in which an up card is used and a weak battle is changed to a medium battle.

FIG. 13-11 (B4) is a scene following FIG. 13-10 (A), and is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting that the cancel card is activated (used) is displayed. FIG. 13-11 (C4) is a scene in which the cancellation card is notified that it will be used. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHPXLC is displayed large in the center of the screen.

FIG. 13-11 (D4) shows a scene in which the cancel card acts on a weak title. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHCXLC is superimposed on the weak title image 011SHJT.

FIG. 13-11 (E4) is a scene in which the weak title on which the cancel card acts is canceled. Specifically, it is a scene in which the weak title image 011SHJT is destroyed. FIG. 13-11 (F4) is a scene in which the middle title is displayed. Specifically, the medium title image 011SHTTT is displayed instead of the destroyed weak title image 011SHJTT. FIG. 13-11 (G4) is a scene in which the middle battle start image 011SHTBS is displayed. Although not shown, a medium battle with the character B will be performed following FIG. 13-11 (G4). That is, FIG. 13-10 (A) → FIG. 13-11 (B4) → FIG. 13-11 (C4) → FIG. 13-11 (D4) → FIG. 13-11 (E4) → FIG. 13-11 (F4) → The flow of FIG. 13-11 (G4) shows a scene in which a cancel card is used and a weak battle is changed to a medium battle.

FIG. 13-12 is an example of an effect operation related to the relief effect. In FIG. 13-12, an example of the effect operation is described for the two flows. First, FIG. 13-12 (A) → FIG. 13-12 (B1) → FIG. 13-12 (C1) → FIG. 13-12 (D1) → FIG. 13-12 (E1) → FIG. 13-12 ( The flow of F1) is an example of an effect operation when the relief effect is executed without using the cancel card (and the up card is not used). Secondly, FIG. 13-12 (A) → FIG. 13-12 (B2) → FIG. 13-12 (C2) → FIG. 13-12 (D2) → FIG. 13-12 (E2) → FIG. 13-12 ( The flow from F2) to FIG. 13-12 (G2) is an example of an effect operation when a cancel card is used and a relief effect is executed.

FIG. 13-12 (A) is a scene in which the LOSE image 011SHKH1 is displayed. FIG. 13-12 (B1) is a scene following FIG. 13-12 (A), and is a scene in which the LOSE image 011SHKH1 is destroyed or the like. FIG. 13-12 (C1) is a scene in which a friendly character stands up. FIG. 13-12 (D1) shows a scene in which a friendly character is fighting back. FIG. 13-12 (E1) is a scene after the ally character makes the final blow. FIG. 13-12 (F1) is a scene in which the WIN image 011SHKH2 is displayed.

FIG. 13-12 (B2) is another scene following FIG. 13-12 (A), in which the activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting that the cancel card is activated (used) is displayed. FIG. 13-12 (C2) is a scene in which the cancellation card is notified that it will be used. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHPXLC is displayed large in the center of the screen.

FIG. 13-12 (D2) shows a scene in which the cancel card acts on the LOSE image 011SHKH1. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHXLC is superimposed on the LOSE image 011SHKH1. FIG. 13-12 (E2) is a scene in which the LOSE image 011SHKH1 is destroyed. FIG. 13-12 (F2) is a scene after the ally character makes the final blow. FIG. 13-11 (G2) is a scene in which the WIN image 011SHKH2 is displayed.

FIG. 13-13 is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence of an item targeting relief. As described above, in the case of super reach (variable patterns # 13 to # 15, # 18 to # 20), a battle effect is performed (see FIG. 13-1), and the mode of the battle effect (battle effect pattern) is , Determined for each variation pattern (see FIGS. 13-3, 13-4, 13-6). The battle production patterns including "relief (win)" are "BP-J-W3" and "BP-J-W4" in the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 18) in FIG. 13-3 (B). And four of "BP-T-W5" to "BP-T-W8" in the super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 19) in Fig. 13-3 (D), and Fig. 13-4 ( There are six "BP-K-W7" to "BP-K-W12" in the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 20) of B). When these battle effect patterns are determined, the relief effect is executed. 13-13 shows the case where the relief effect is executed (that is, "BP-J-W3", "BP-J-W4", "BP-T-W5" to "BP-T-W8", "BP". -K-W7" to "BP-K-W12"), the determination ratio (example) of the presence or absence of an item is shown.

In FIG. 13-13, "presence or absence of use" in the "presence or absence of use, presence or absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" is the presence or absence of use of items (up card, cancellation card) in the execution of the relief effect. is there. "Not used" in the decision content column indicates that the item will not be used when executing the relief effect, and "Used" in the decision content column indicates that the item will be used when executing the relief effect.

In FIG. 13-13, the “acquisition / non-acquisition” in the “presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions” column indicates the acquisition (stock) of the item when the item is used when executing the relief effect. ) Is present or absent. "Not acquired" in the decision content column indicates that the item to be used will not be acquired (stocked) when the presence or absence of use is "used", and "acquired" in the decision content column indicates whether or not it is used. Indicates that the item to be used will be acquired (stocked) when is "used".

In FIG. 13-13, the "type" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column is the type of the item when the item to be used when executing the relief effect is acquired. .. "Up card" in the decision content column indicates that an up card will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquisition", and the "cancellation card" in the decision content column Indicates that a cancellation card will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired".

In FIG. 13-13, the "acquisition timing" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column is the timing of acquisition when the item to be used when executing the relief effect is acquired. Is. "Immediately after the start of fluctuation" in the decision content column indicates that the product will be acquired immediately after the start of fluctuation when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquisition". "Immediately after" indicates that the acquisition is performed immediately after the reach when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired".

In FIG. 13-13, the "acquisition number" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column is the quantity of the acquisition when the item to be used when executing the relief effect is acquired. is there. "1 card" in the decision content column indicates that one card (up card or cancellation card) will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired". There is.

In other words, the decision items in the decision content column ("Used", "Used, Not acquired", "Used, Acquired, Upcard, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "Used, Acquired, Upcard" , "Immediately after reach, 1 card", "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card") Indicates that neither the up card nor the cancel card will be used when executing the relief effect. That is, it indicates that the item is not acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the fluctuation or immediately after the reach, and the item is not used when the relief effect is executed, and the relief effect is simply executed. 13-12 (A)-> 13-12 (B1)-> 13-12 (C1)-> 13-12 (D1)-> 13-12 (E1)-> 13-12 (F1). The flow is simply an example of an effect operation when a relief effect is executed.

"Used, not acquired" indicates that the item is used but the item to be used is not acquired (stocked) when the relief effect is executed. In other words, it indicates that the item will be used when executing the relief effect without acquiring (stocking) the item immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reaching. The item used is a cancellation card.

"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of the change, 1 card" is related to the execution of the relief effect, and one up card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the change, and the up card is used when the relief effect is executed. Indicates that However, the decision rate is 0%.

"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the execution of the relief effect, and one up card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and the up card is used when executing the relief effect. Indicates that it will be done. However, the decision rate is 0%.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of the change, one card" is related to the execution of the relief effect, and one cancel card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the change, and the cancel card is used when the relief effect is executed. Indicates that

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the execution of the relief effect, and one cancellation card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and the cancel card is used when executing the relief effect. Indicates that it will be done.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-13, "not used" is determined at a rate of 1%, "used / not acquired" is determined at a rate of 9%, and "used / acquired / upcard," "Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 0%, "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 0%, "used, acquired, canceled card" , Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card is determined at a rate of 75%, and "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 15%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-13, the cancel card may be used when executing the relief effect, but the up card may not be used. In addition, neither the up card nor the cancel card may be used when performing the relief effect. When executing the relief effect, the rate at which the cancel card is used is 99%, the rate at which the up card is used is 0%, and the rate at which neither the up card nor the cancel card is used is 1%. .. That is, when the relief effect is executed, the cancellation card is used very frequently (99%) when the relief effect is executed.

In addition, there are cases where the item (specifically, the cancellation card) used when executing the relief effect is acquired (stocked) or not acquired (when used without acquisition). When using an item (cancellation card) when executing a relief effect, the ratio of acquiring the item (cancellation card) is about 91% (90/99), and the ratio of not acquiring the item (cancellation card) is about. It is 9% (9/99). That is, when the item (cancellation card) is used when executing the relief effect, the item (cancellation card) is acquired at a very high frequency (about 91%).

In addition, when acquiring an item (cancellation card) used when executing a relief effect, the item (cancellation card) may be acquired immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach. When acquiring items (cancellation cards) to be used when executing relief effects, the ratio of acquisition immediately after the start of fluctuation is about 83% (75/90), and the ratio of acquisition immediately after reach is about 17% (15 /). 90). That is, when acquiring an item (cancellation card) used when executing a relief effect, the frequency of acquisition immediately after the start of fluctuation is higher than the frequency of acquisition immediately after reach.

FIG. 13-14 is an example of the determination ratio of the presence or absence of items targeting the completion of the battle. As described above, in the case of super reach (variable patterns # 13 to # 15, # 18 to # 20), a battle effect is performed (see FIG. 13-1), and the mode of the battle effect (battle effect pattern) is , Determined for each variation pattern (see FIGS. 13-3, 13-4, 13-6). The battle production pattern including "weak title-> medium title" or "medium title-> strong title" is "BP-TL1" in Fig. 13-3 (C), which is out of the super reach (medium battle) (variation pattern # 14). , "BP-T-L3" and "BP-T-W1", "BP-T-W3" in the super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 19) in Fig. 13-3 (D). , "BP-T-W5", "BP-T-W7", and "BP-K-L1" in the outlier (variation pattern # 15) of the super reach (strong battle) in FIG. 13-4 (A), "BP-K-L2", "BP-K-L4", "BP-K-L5" and "B" in the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 20) in Fig. 13-4 (B). BP-K-W1 "," BP-K-W2 "," BP-K-W4 "," BP-K-W5 "," BP-K-W7 "," BP-K-W8 "," BP- There are eight types, "K-W10" and "BP-K-W11". When these battle production patterns are determined, the battle is completed. FIG. 13-14 shows a determination ratio (one example) of the presence or absence of items when the battle is completed.

FIG. 13-14 (A) is an example of a determination ratio of the presence or absence of an item, etc., when the number of battles is one and the item for which relief is targeted is not acquired. FIG. 13-14 (B) is an example of a determination ratio of the presence or absence of an item, etc., when the number of battles is one and the item for which relief is targeted is acquired. FIG. 13-14 (C) is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence of an item, etc., when the number of battles is 2 times and the item for which relief is targeted is not acquired. FIG. 13-14 (D) is an example of a determination ratio of the presence or absence of an item, etc., when the number of battles has been completed twice and the item for which relief is targeted has been acquired.

The number of battles that occur once corresponds to the case where the weak title is displayed first in the medium battle and the case where the medium title is displayed first in the strong battle. Specifically, "BP-T-L1" and "BP-T-L3" in the outlier (variation pattern # 14) of the super reach (medium battle) in FIG. 13-3 (C) and FIG. 13-3. Of "BP-T-W1", "BP-T-W3", "BP-T-W5", "BP-T-W7" in the super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 19) of (D) Four, two of "BP-K-L2" and "BP-K-L5" in the super reach (strong battle) outlier (variation pattern # 15) of FIG. 13-4 (A), and FIG. 13-4 (B). ) Super reach (strong battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 20) "BP-K-W2", "BP-K-W5", "BP-K-W8", "BP-K-W11" Is.

Two battles occur when a strong battle is displayed but a weak title is displayed first. Specifically, "BP-K-L1" and "BP-K-L4" in the outlier (variation pattern # 15) of the super reach (strong battle) in FIG. 13-4 (A) and FIG. 13-4. Of "BP-K-W1", "BP-K-W4", "BP-K-W7", "BP-K-W10" in the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 20) of (B) There are four.

The case of not acquiring an item targeting relief corresponds to the case where the relief is not performed and the case where the relief is performed but the item is not acquired (stocked) targeting the relief. When the item is relieved but the item is not stocked for the relief, specifically, the decision items in Fig. 13-13 (“Not used”, “Used, Not acquired”, “Used, Acquired, Up” Card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card, "used, available, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card", "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "used, acquired Yes, cancel card, immediately after reach, 1 card ”),“ not used ”,“ used, not acquired ”is determined.

The acquisition of items targeting relief corresponds to the case of stocking items for relief. Specifically, the determination items in Fig. 13-13 (“Not used”, “Used, Not acquired”, “Used, Acquired, Upcard, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card”, “Used, Acquired” , Up card, immediately after reach, 1 card ”,“ Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card ”,“ Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card ”) Used, acquired, up card, immediately after change start, 1 card, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card", "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after change start, 1 card" , "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is decided. However, as described above, the determination ratios of "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" are both set to 0%. There is.

In FIG. 13-14, "whether or not to use" in the "whether or not to use, whether or not to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column is whether or not to use the item (up card, cancel card) at the beginning of the battle. .. "Not used" in the decision content column indicates that the item will not be used at the start of the battle, and "Used" in the decision content column indicates that the item will be used at the start of the battle.

In FIG. 13-14, the “acquisition / non-acquisition” in the “presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions” column indicates the acquisition (stock) of the item when the item is used at the start of the battle. Presence or absence. "Not acquired" in the decision content column indicates that the item to be used will not be acquired (stocked) when the presence or absence of use is "used", and "acquired" in the decision content column indicates whether or not it is used. Indicates that the item to be used will be acquired (stocked) when is "used".

In FIG. 13-14, the “type” in the “presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions” column is the type of the item when the item to be used at the start of the battle is acquired. "Up card" in the decision content column indicates that an up card will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquisition", and the "cancellation card" in the decision content column Indicates that a cancellation card will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired".

In FIG. 13-14, the “acquisition timing” in the “presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions” column is the timing of acquisition when the item to be used at the start of the battle is acquired. .. "Immediately after the start of fluctuation" in the decision content column indicates that the product will be acquired immediately after the start of fluctuation when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquisition". "Immediately after" indicates that the acquisition is performed immediately after the reach when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired".

In FIG. 13-14, the “acquisition number” in the “presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions” column is the number of acquisitions when the item to be used at the start of the battle is acquired. "1 card" in the decision content column indicates that one card (up card or cancellation card) will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired". For "2 cards" in the decision content column, 2 cards (2 up cards or 2 cancellation cards) are used when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired". Indicates that it will be acquired.

That is, in FIG. 13-14 (A) (the same applies to FIG. 13-14 (B)), the decision items (“not used”, “used, not acquired”, “used, with acquisition,” in the determination content column. Up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card, "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card", "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "Used, Of "acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card"), "not used" indicates that neither the up card nor the cancel card will be used at the start of one battle. In other words, it indicates that the item is not acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after the reach, and the item is not used for the completion of one battle, and only one battle is completed. .. Note that the flow of FIG. 13-10 (A) → FIG. 13-10 (B2) → FIG. 13-10 (C2) is an example of an effect operation when only one battle is completed and executed.

"Used, not acquired" indicates that the item will be used but the item to be used will not be acquired (stocked) at the start of one battle. In other words, it indicates that the item will be used at the beginning of one battle without acquiring (stocking) the item immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reaching. The item used is an up card.

"Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of the change, 1 card" is related to the start of one battle, and one upcard is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the change, and when the start of one battle , Indicates that the up card is used.

"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the completion of one battle, and one up card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and when one battle is completed, the said Indicates that an up card will be used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of the change, 1 card" is related to the start of one battle, and one cancellation card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the change, and when one battle starts. , Indicates that the cancellation card will be used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the completion of one battle, and one cancellation card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and when one battle is completed, the said Indicates that a cancellation card will be used.

Further, in FIG. 13-14 (C) (the same applies to FIG. 13-14 (D)), the decision items (“not used”, “used, not acquired”, “used, with acquisition,” in the determination content column. Up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card, "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card", "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "Used, Of "acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 2 cards", "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card", "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards") , "Not used" indicates that neither the up card nor the cancel card will be used when the two battles are completed. In other words, the item is not acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after the reach, and the item is not used for the first and second battles, and the first and second battles are simply executed. Indicates that it will be done.

"Used, not acquired" indicates that the item will be used but the item to be used will not be acquired (stocked) when the two battles are completed. In other words, it indicates that the item will be used at the beginning of the first and second battles without acquiring (stocking) the item immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reaching. The item to be used is an up card both for the first time and for the second time.

"Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is related to the start of two battles, and one upcard is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of fluctuation, and the first and second times. It indicates that an up card will be used when the battle starts. Specifically, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, one up card used for the first battle is stocked, and one up card used for the second battle is not stocked. Therefore, in the first battle, the stocked upcards are used, and in the second battle, the unstocked upcards are used.

"Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is related to the completion of 2 battles, and 1 upcard is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and the 1st and 2nd battles It indicates that an up card will be used at the time of the start-up. Specifically, immediately after the reach, one up card used for the first battle is stocked, and one up card used for the second battle is not stocked. Therefore, in the first battle, the stocked upcards are used, and in the second battle, the unstocked upcards are used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is related to the start of two battles, and one cancellation card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of fluctuation, and the first and second times. It indicates that a cancellation card will be used when the battle starts. Specifically, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, one cancellation card used at the start of the first battle is stocked, and one cancellation card used at the start of the second battle is not stocked. Therefore, in the first battle, the stocked cancellation card is used, and in the second battle, the unstocked cancellation card is used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of the change, 2 cards" is related to the start of the 2 battles, and 2 canceled cards are acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the change, and the 1st and 2nd times It indicates that a cancellation card will be used when the battle starts. Specifically, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, a total of two cards are stocked: one cancel card used for the first battle and one cancellation card used for the second battle. Therefore, the stock cancellation card is used in both the first battle and the second battle.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the completion of 2 battles, and 1 cancellation card is acquired (stocked) immediately after reach, and the 1st and 2nd battles are completed. At that time, it indicates that a cancellation card will be used. Specifically, immediately after the reach, one cancellation card used for the first battle is stocked, and one cancellation card used for the second battle is not stocked. Therefore, in the first battle, the stocked cancellation card is used, and in the second battle, the unstocked cancellation card is used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards" is related to the 2nd battle, and 2 cancellation cards are acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and the 1st and 2nd battles are completed. At that time, it indicates that a cancellation card will be used. Specifically, immediately after the reach, a total of two cards are stocked, one is a cancel card used when the first battle is completed and one is used when the second battle is completed. Therefore, the stock cancellation card is used in both the first battle and the second battle.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (A), when the number of battles is 1 and the item whose target is relief is not acquired, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "" "Used, acquired, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 40%, "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 10%, and "used, acquired, upcard" is determined. , Immediately after reach, 1 card "is determined at a rate of 5%," Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card "is determined at a rate of 30%," Used, acquired, canceled "Card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is decided at a rate of 10%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (B), when the number of battles is 1 and the item for which relief is targeted is acquired, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "" "Used, acquired, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 20%, "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 10%, and "used, acquired, upcard" is determined. , Immediately after reach, 1 card "is determined at a rate of 5%," Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card "is determined at a rate of 40%," Used, acquired, canceled "Card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is decided at a rate of 20%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (C), when the number of battles is 2 times and the item for which relief is not acquired is not acquired, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "" "Used, acquired, up card" is determined at a rate of 20%, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 10%, and "used, acquired, up card" is determined. , Immediately after reach, 1 card "is determined at a rate of 5%," Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card "is determined at a rate of 25%," Used, acquired, canceled "Card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 2 cards" is determined at a rate of 5%, "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 25%, "used, acquired," Cancellation card, immediately after reach, 2 cards "will be decided at a rate of 5%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (D), when the number of battles is 2 times and the item for which relief is targeted is acquired, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "" "Used, acquired, up card" is determined at a rate of 20%, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 10%, and "used, acquired, up card" is determined. , Immediately after reach, 1 card "is determined at a rate of 5%," Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card "is determined at a rate of 5%," Used, acquired, canceled "Card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 2 cards" is determined at a rate of 25%, "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 5%, "used, acquired, available, Cancellation card, immediately after reach, 2 cards "will be decided at a rate of 25%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14, the up card may be used or the cancel card may be used when executing the battle rise. In addition, neither the up card nor the cancel card may be used when executing the battle. As an example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (A) (when the number of battle rises is 1 and the item for which relief is not acquired is not acquired), the battle rise is executed when the battle rise is executed. At the time of execution, the rate of using the up card is 55%, the rate of using the cancel card is 40%, and the rate of not using the up card or the cancel card is 5%.

In addition, there are cases where items (up cards, cancellation cards) used when executing the battle are acquired (stock) or not (when used without acquisition). As an example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (A) (when the number of battle rises is 1 and the item for which relief is not acquired is not acquired), the item (up card) is executed when the battle rise is executed. , Cancel card) is used, the ratio of acquiring the item is about 58% (55/95), and the ratio of not acquiring the item is about 42% (40/95).

In addition, when acquiring an item (up card, cancel card) to be used when executing a battle rise, even if the item (up card, cancel card) is acquired immediately after the start of fluctuation, it is acquired immediately after reach. In some cases. As an example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (A) (when the number of battle rises is 1 and the item for which relief is not acquired is not acquired), the item used when executing the battle rise ( When acquiring an up card or a cancel card), the ratio of acquisition immediately after the start of fluctuation is about 73% (40/55), and the ratio of acquisition immediately after reach is about 27% (15/55).

13-15 and 13-16 are examples of determination ratios such as the presence / absence of items targeting pseudo-reams. As described above, the presence / absence and the number of pseudo-reams are determined according to the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 13-2). 13-15 and 13-16 show the determination ratio (example) of the presence / absence of an item, etc. when it is determined that the item is pseudo-continuous (1 pseudo-ream, 2 pseudo-ream, or 3 pseudo-ream). There is.

FIG. 13-15 (A) is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence of items, etc. in the case of normal reach (off) and pseudo-continuous possession. FIG. 13-15 (B) is an example of a determination ratio of the presence or absence of an item in the case of normal reach (big hit) and pseudo-continuous possession. FIG. 13-16 (A) is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence of items, etc. in the case of super reach (off) and pseudo-continuous possession. FIG. 13-16 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence of items, etc. in the case of super reach (big hit), pseudo-continuous possession, and the number of canceled cards acquired is 0 to 2. FIG. 13-16 (C) is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence of items, etc. in the case of super reach (big hit), pseudo-continuous possession, and the number of canceled cards acquired is three.

The "number of canceled cards acquired" in FIGS. 13-16 (B) and 13-16 (C) refers to the number of canceled cards acquired targeting the start of the battle and the number of canceled cards acquired targeting relief. , Is the total number of cancellation cards obtained. That is, it is the number of canceled cards acquired by targeting other than pseudo-ren. In the battle production in the super reach (big hit), both the battle start and the relief production may be executed. The number of canceled cards acquired as the target for the start of battle is 0 to 2 (see FIG. 13-14), and the number of acquired cancellation cards targeted for relief is 0 to 1 (see FIG. 13-13). That is, in the case of super reach (big hit), 0 to 3 cancellation cards are acquired by targeting other than pseudo-ren. If three cancellation cards are acquired by targeting a non-pseudo-ren and one cancel card is acquired by targeting a pseudo-ream, the total number of cancellation cards acquired will be four, but four cancellation cards will be acquired. The acquisition of the above means that the cancellation card targeting the relief has been acquired, and the relief effect will be executed at a relatively early stage. In order to prevent future baldness, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (B), the acquisition of cancellation cards is permitted when "the number of canceled cards acquired is 0 to 2", while as shown in FIG. 13-16 (C). In the case of "when the number of cancellation cards acquired is 3," the acquisition of cancellation cards is restricted (0%).

In the battle effect in Super Reach (off), the relief effect is not executed, so 0 to 2 cancellation cards are acquired as targets other than the pseudo-ren. Therefore, there is no pre-barre, so no restrictions are applied. Also, in normal reach (off, big hit), the battle production itself is not performed, so there is no restriction.

In FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16, "presence / absence of use" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" is the item (up card, cancellation card) in the pseudo-ream. Whether or not it is used. "Not used" in the decision content column indicates that the item will not be used when executing the pseudo-ren, and "used" in the decision content column indicates that the item will be used when executing the pseudo-ren.

In FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16, "presence / absence of acquisition" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" is the case where the item is used when executing the pseudo-ream. Whether or not an item has been acquired (stocked). "Not acquired" in the decision content column indicates that the item to be used will not be acquired (stocked) when the presence or absence of use is "used", and "acquired" in the decision content column indicates whether or not it is used. Indicates that the item to be used will be acquired (stocked) when is "used".

In FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16, the "type" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column is the case of acquiring the item to be used when executing the pseudo-ream. The type of item. "Up card" in the decision content column indicates that an up card will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquisition", and the "cancellation card" in the decision content column Indicates that a cancellation card will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired".

In FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16, the "acquisition timing" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" is the case of acquiring the item to be used when executing the pseudo-ream. It is the timing of the acquisition. "Immediately after the start of fluctuation" in the decision content column indicates that the product will be acquired immediately after the start of fluctuation when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquisition". "Immediately after" indicates that the acquisition is performed immediately after the reach when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired".

In FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16, the "acquisition number" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" is the case of acquiring the item to be used when executing the pseudo-ream. The quantity of the acquisition. "1 card" in the decision content column indicates that one card (up card or cancellation card) will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired". There is.

That is, in FIG. 13-15 (A) (the same applies to FIGS. 13-15 (B) and 13-16 (A) to 13-16 (C)), the determination item (“not used”) in the determination content column. , "Used, not acquired", "Used, Acquired, Upcard, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "Used, Acquired, Upcard, Immediately after reach, 1 card", "Used, Acquired" , Cancel card, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card "," Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after reach, 1 card ")," Not used "is for both up card and cancel card when executing pseudo-ream. Indicates that it will not be used. In other words, it indicates that the item is not acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after the reach, and the item is not used when executing the pseudo-ren, and the pseudo-ren is simply executed. 13-8 (A)-> 13-8 (B)-> 13-8 (C)-> 13-8 (D)-> 13-8 (E3)-> 13-8 (F3). The flow is simply an example of an effect operation when a pseudo-ream is executed.

In the super reach (FIGS. 13-16 (A) to 13-16 (C)), the pseudo-ream may be 2 times or the pseudo-ream 3 times (see FIG. 13-2), but the pseudo-ream is 2 times. In the case of, the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item for the first time or the second time. In the case of three pseudo-reams, the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item for the first, second, and third times.

"Used, not acquired" indicates that the item is used but the item to be used is not acquired (stocked) when the pseudo-ream is executed. In other words, it indicates that the item will be used when executing the pseudo-ream without acquiring (stocking) the item immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reaching. The item used is an up card.

In the super reach (FIGS. 13-16 (A) to 13-16 (C)), the pseudo-ream may be 2 times or the pseudo-ream 3 times (see FIG. 13-2), but the pseudo-ream is 2 times. In the case of, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the item (up card), and the second time the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item. In the case of three pseudo-reams, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the item (up card), and the second and third times the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item.

"Used, Acquired, Upcard, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is related to the execution of the pseudo-ream, and when the pseudo-ream is executed, one upcard is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the fluctuation. Indicates that an up card will be used.

In the super reach (FIGS. 13-16 (A) to 13-16 (C)), the pseudo-ream may be 2 times or the pseudo-ream 3 times (see FIG. 13-2), but the pseudo-ream is 2 times. In the case of, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the stock up card, and the second time the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item. In the case of three pseudo-reams, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the stock upcard, and the second and third times the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item.

"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the execution of the pseudo-ren, and one up card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and when the pseudo-ren is executed, the up card is acquired. Indicates that

In the case of "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card", as in the case of "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", the pseudo-ream is performed twice. In the case of 3 times, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the stock up card, and after that, the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is related to the execution of the pseudo-ream, and when the pseudo-ream is executed, one cancellation card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the fluctuation. Indicates that a cancellation card will be used.

In the super reach (FIGS. 13-16 (A) to 13-16 (C)), the pseudo-ream may be 2 times or the pseudo-ream 3 times (see FIG. 13-2), but the pseudo-ream is 2 times. In the case of, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the stock cancel card, and the second time the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item. In the case of three pseudo-reams, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the stock cancel card, and the second and third times the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the execution of the pseudo-ream, and one cancel card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and when the pseudo-ream is executed, the cancel card is obtained. Indicates that

In the case of "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card", as in the case of "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", the pseudo-ream is performed twice. In the case of three times, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the stock cancellation card, and after that, the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (A), in the case of normal reach (off) and pseudo-continuous use, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used / not acquired" is 12%. "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined by the ratio of 26%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is 47. Determined at a rate of%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 2%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" Determined at a rate of 8%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (B), in the case of normal reach (big hit) and pseudo-continuous possession, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used / not acquired" is 15%. "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined by the ratio of 25%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is 45 Determined at a rate of%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 2%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" Determined at a rate of 8%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), in the case of super reach (off) and pseudo-continuous possession, "not used" is determined at a rate of 6%, and "used / not acquired" is 11 Determined at a rate of%, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a ratio of 26%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" Determined at a rate of 47%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 2%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" Is determined at a rate of 8%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-16 (B), in the case of super reach (big hit), pseudo-continuous possession, and the number of canceled cards acquired is 0 to 2, "not used" is a ratio of 6%. "Used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 14%, "Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 25%, and "used, available, "Acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 45%, "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 2%, and "used" , Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after reach, 1 card "is determined at a rate of 8%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-16 (C), in the case of super reach (big hit), pseudo-continuous possession, and the number of canceled cards acquired is 3, "unused" is determined at a rate of 6%. Then, "used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 14%, "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 25%, and "used, acquired" is determined. , Up card, immediately after reach, 1 card "was determined at a rate of 55%," used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card "was determined at a rate of 0%," used, acquired Yes, cancel card, immediately after reach, 1 card "is decided at a rate of 0%.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 13-15 and 16, an up card may be used or a cancel card may be used when executing the pseudo-ream. In addition, neither the up card nor the cancel card may be used when executing the pseudo-ream. As an example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (A) (in the case of normal reach (off)), in the case of executing the pseudo-ream, the rate at which the up card is used when executing the pseudo-ream is 85%. , The rate at which cancellation cards are used is 10%, and the rate at which neither up cards nor cancellation cards are used is 5%.

In addition, the item (up card, cancel card) used when executing the pseudo-ream may or may not be acquired (used without acquisition). As an example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (A) (in the case of normal reach (off)), when the item (up card, cancel card) is used when executing the pseudo-ream, the item is used. The rate of acquisition is about 87% (83/95), and the rate of not acquiring the item is about 13% (12/95).

In addition, when acquiring an item (up card, cancel card) to be used when executing a pseudo-ream, even if the item (up card, cancel card) is acquired immediately after the start of fluctuation, it is acquired immediately after reach. In some cases. As an example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (A) (in the case of normal reach (off)), it fluctuates when acquiring the item (up card, cancel card) used when executing the pseudo-ream. The rate of acquisition immediately after the start is about 34% (28/83), and the rate of acquisition immediately after reach is about 66% (55/83).

13-17 and 13-18 are explanatory views for explaining various timings. Specifically, FIGS. 13-17 (A) and 13-17 (B) are explanatory diagrams for explaining execution timings and the like of various effects in the variable display that is super reach (off). FIG. 13-17 (B) is a continuation of FIG. 13-17 (A).

In FIG. 13-17 (A), T0 is the start timing of the variable display. T1 is the timing of acquisition of the item (stock) when the item (up card, cancellation card) is acquired "immediately after the start of fluctuation (see FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16)". Since the acquired item is displayed, T1 is also the timing of displaying the item when the item is acquired "immediately after the start of fluctuation". T2 is the timing to reach. T3 is the timing of acquisition of the item when the item is acquired "immediately after reach (see FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16)" (stock). Since the acquired item is displayed, T3 is also the timing of displaying the item when the item is acquired "immediately after reach".

T4 is a timing at which symbols (normal symbols, non-pseudo-continuous symbols) other than the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the item is performed. When performing a pseudo-ream notice effect using an item, the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped by using the item, so that the normal symbol is stopped before the item is used (Fig. 13-8 (F1), See FIG. 13-9).

T5 to T6 are effects of displaying activation effects (activation image 011SHHD1 and activation image 011SHHD2) suggesting that the item is activated (used) when a pseudo-continuous notice effect using the item is performed. FIG. 13-9. (G4), see FIG. 13-9 (G5)). When performing a pseudo-continuous notice effect using an item, the activation effect is executed before the item is used. Note that FIG. 13-9 (G4) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the up card is performed. FIG. 13-9 (G5) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the cancel card is performed.

T7 to T8 are the period of use of the item when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the item is performed. It should be noted that FIGS. 13-9 (H4) and 13-9 (I4) are display examples during the period of use of the up card when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the up card is performed. Further, FIGS. 13-9 (H5) and 13-9 (I5) are display examples during the period of use of the cancel card when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the cancel card is performed.

T9 is a timing at which a change (movement, destruction, etc.) of a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol starts when a pseudo-continuous notice effect using an item is performed. That is, it is the timing when the items used in T7 to T8 act on the symbols other than the pseudo-continuous symbols displayed temporarily stopped in T4, and the change (movement, destruction, etc.) of the symbols starts. Note that FIG. 13-9 (J4) is a display example when the up card acts on a symbol "6" other than the pseudo-continuous symbol and the symbol "6" is moving. FIG. 13-9 (J5) is a display example when the cancel card acts on the symbol “6” other than the pseudo-continuous symbol and the symbol “6” is destroyed.

T10 is a timing at which the pseudo-ream symbol temporarily stops when the pseudo-ream notice effect is performed. That is, it is the timing at which the first pseudo-ream symbol in the pseudo-ream (1 pseudo-ream, 2 pseudo-ream, 3 pseudo-ream) temporarily stops. Note that FIG. 13-9 (L4) is a display example when the symbol "6", which is a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol, moves due to the action of the up card, and the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. FIG. 13-9 (L5) is a display example when the symbol "6", which is a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol, is destroyed by the action of the cancel card, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped.

T11 is a timing at which the revariable display starts when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is performed. That is, it is the timing of revariable display after the first temporary stop of the pseudo-ream symbol in the pseudo-ream (1 pseudo-ream, 2 pseudo-ream, 3 pseudo-ream).

T12 is a timing at which the pseudo-ream symbol temporarily stops when the pseudo-ream notice effect is performed. That is, it is the timing at which the second pseudo-continuous symbol in the pseudo-continuous possession (pseudo-ream 2 times, pseudo-ream 3 times) temporarily stops. T13 is a timing at which the revariable display starts when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is performed. That is, it is the timing of revariable display after the second temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the pseudo-continuous possession (pseudo-ream 2 times, pseudo-ream 3 times).

T14 is a timing at which the pseudo-ream symbol temporarily stops when the pseudo-ream notice effect is performed. That is, it is the timing at which the third pseudo-continuous symbol in the pseudo-continuous possession (three pseudo-continuous) temporarily stops. T15 is the timing at which the revariable display starts when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is performed. That is, it is the timing of revariable display after the third temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the pseudo-continuous possession (pseudo-continuous 3 times). T16 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T17 is the timing to start displaying the title of the weak battle (weak title). That is, T17 is the timing to start displaying the weak title when the weak battle is executed, or when the medium battle or the strong battle is executed and the weak title is displayed.

T18 to T19 are effects of displaying activation effects (activation image 011SHHD1 and activation image 011SHHD2) suggesting that the item is activated (used) when a battle is completed using the item (weak battle → medium battle). It is an execution period of FIG. 13-11 (B3) and FIG. 13-11 (B4). When a battle is completed using an item (weak battle → medium battle), the activation effect is executed before the item is used. Note that FIG. 13-11 (B3) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when the battle is completed using the up card. FIG. 13-11 (B4) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when the battle is completed using the cancel card.

T20 to T21 are the period of use of the item when the battle is completed (weak battle → medium battle) using the item. Note that FIGS. 13-11 (C3) and 13-11 (D3) are display examples during the period of use of the up card when the battle is completed (weak battle → medium battle) using the up card. Further, FIGS. 13-11 (C4) and 13-11 (D4) are display examples in the period of use of the cancel card when the battle completion (weak battle → medium battle) using the cancel card is performed.

T22 is the timing at which the change of the weak title starts when the battle is completed using the item (weak battle → medium battle). That is, it is the timing when the items used in T20 to T21 act on the weak title displayed in T17 and the change of the weak title starts. Note that FIG. 13-11 (E3) is a display example when the up card acts on a weak title and the weak title changes to a weak medium title. FIG. 13-11 (E4) is a display example when the cancel card acts on the weak title and the weak title is destroyed.

T23 is the timing to start displaying the title of the middle battle (middle title). That is, T23 is the timing to start displaying the middle title when the middle battle is executed or when the strong battle is executed and the middle title is displayed.

T24 to T25 are execution periods of the activation effect suggesting that the item is activated (used) when the battle completion (medium battle → strong battle) using the item is performed. When a battle is completed using an item (medium battle → strong battle), the activation effect is executed before the item is used.

T26 to T27 are the period of use of the item when the battle is completed using the item (medium battle → strong battle).

T28 is the timing at which the change of the middle title starts when the battle is completed using the item (medium battle → strong battle). That is, it is the timing when the items used in T26 to T27 act on the middle title displayed in T23 and the change of the middle title starts.

T29 is the timing to start displaying the title of the strong battle (strong title). That is, T29 is the timing to start displaying the strong title when the strong battle is executed.

T30 is the timing to start the execution of the battle effect. T31 to T32 are operating periods of the accessory (movable body 011SH32). T41 is the timing to start displaying the result display (defeat) of the battle effect. T42 is the timing at which the execution of the battle effect is finished. T43 is the end timing of the variable display.

13-17 (A) and 13-18 (A) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution timing and the like of various effects in the variable display (without relief effect) which is a super reach (big hit). FIG. 13-18 (A) is a continuation of FIG. 13-17 (A).

As shown in FIGS. 13-17 (B) and 13-18 (A), a variable display that becomes a super reach (off) and a variable display that becomes a super reach (big hit) (no relief effect) are variable. The display is a variable display that is super reach (off), and while defeat is displayed as the result display of the battle effect and the out-of-order symbol is displayed (T41, T42 in Fig. 13-17 (B)), super reach In the variable display (no relief effect) that becomes (big hit), the victory is displayed as the result display of the battle effect, and the big hit symbol is displayed (T41, T42 in FIGS. 13-18 (A)).

13-17 (A) and 13-18 (B) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution timing and the like of various effects in the variable display (with relief effect) which is a super reach (big hit). 13-18 (B) is a continuation of FIG. 13-17 (A).

As shown in FIGS. 13-18 (A) and 13-18 (B), a variable display that is a super reach (big hit) and a variable display that is a super reach (big hit) and a variable display that is a super reach (big hit). The presence / absence of display, effect, etc. in T33 to T40 is different from the variable display that is the display (with relief effect).

In FIG. 13-18 (B), T33 is a timing to start displaying the result display (defeat) of the battle effect when the relief using the item (specifically, the cancel card) is performed.

In T34 to T35, when relief using the item is performed, the execution of the activation effect (effect of displaying the activation image 011SHHD2. See FIG. 13-12 (B2)) suggesting that the item is activated (used). The period. Note that FIG. 13-12 (B2) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when the relief using the cancel card is performed.

T36 to T37 are the period of use of the item when the relief using the item is performed. Note that FIGS. 13-12 (C2) and 13-12 (D2) are display examples during the period of use of the cancel card when relief using the cancel card is performed.

T38 is the timing at which the change of the result display (defeat) of the battle effect starts when the relief using the item is performed. That is, it is the timing when the items used in T36 to T37 act on the display result (defeat) displayed in T33, and the change of the display result (defeat) starts. Note that FIG. 13-12 (E2) is a display example when the cancel card acts on the display result (defeat) and the display result (defeat) is destroyed.

T39 to T40 are execution periods of the relief effect when the relief using the item is performed. Note that FIG. 13-12 (F2) is a display example during the execution period of the relief effect when the relief using the cancel card is performed.

It should be noted that the result display (defeat) at T41 in FIG. 13-17 (B) and the result display (defeat) at T33 in FIG. 13-18 (B) cannot be easily distinguished by the player except for items. Is preferable. In other words, when the result display (defeat) of the battle effect is displayed, the player is either the result display (defeat) in the variable display that becomes the super reach (missing) for the result display (defeat), or the super reach (big hit). ) Is the result display (defeat) in the variable display (with relief effect), if it is determined by the presence or absence of the item, the rabbit can also be determined by something other than the item. It is preferable to make it indistinguishable easily.

For example, the time (T0 to T41) until the result display (defeat) in the variable display that becomes the super reach (missing) and the result display (defeat) in the variable display that becomes the super reach (big hit) (with relief effect). ) May not be perceived as much as the difference from the time (T0 to T33). As an example, in the case of super reach of a weak battle with a special figure fluctuation time of 130 seconds, fluctuation pattern # 13 (weak battle (outside)) and battle production pattern "BP-J-L1" start fluctuation. The result display (defeat) is displayed 125 seconds after the start of the change, and the result is displayed (defeat) 115 seconds after the start of the change in the fluctuation pattern # 18 (weak battle (big hit)) and the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3" with relief. ) May be displayed. Further, in the case of the super reach of the medium battle in which the special figure fluctuation time is 140 seconds, in the case of the fluctuation pattern # 14 (medium battle (outside)) and the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1", from the start of the fluctuation. The result display (defeat) is displayed 135 seconds later, and the result is displayed (defeat) 125 seconds after the start of the fluctuation in the battle pattern # 19 (weak battle (big hit)) and the battle production pattern "BP-J-W5" with relief. May be displayed. In addition, in the case of super reach of a strong battle with a special figure fluctuation time of 150 seconds, in the case of fluctuation pattern # 15 (strong battle (outside)) and the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1", from the start of fluctuation. The result display (defeat) is displayed after 145 seconds, and the result is displayed (defeat) 135 seconds after the start of the fluctuation in the battle pattern # 20 (weak battle (big hit)) and the battle production pattern "BP-J-W7" with relief. May be displayed.

13-19 and 13-20 are specific examples of various timings. In FIG. 13-19, "fluctuation pattern # 14" is determined as the variation pattern (see FIG. 13-1 (B)), and pseudo-ream (once pseudo-ream) is determined for the pseudo-ream (see FIG. 13-2). ), "BP-TL3 (weak title-> medium title-> medium battle start-> battle (loss))" is determined as the battle production pattern (see Fig. 13-3 (C) and Fig. 13-6 (B)). ), "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, one card" was decided as an item targeting the start of the battle (see Fig. 13-14 (A)), and an item targeting a pseudo-ream, etc. Various timings are shown when "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, one card" is determined (see FIG. 13-16 (A)). It should be noted that FIG. 13-19 (A) → FIG. 13-19 (B). Further, in the description of FIG. 13-19, some or all of the contents described in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18 will be omitted.

In FIG. 13-19 (A), T1 is the timing at which one up card targeting the pseudo-ream and one cancel card targeting the completion of the battle are acquired (displayed).

In FIG. 13-19 (A), T5 to T6 are execution periods of the activation effect suggesting that the up card is activated (used). T7 to T8 are the period of use of the up card. T9 is a timing at which the up card acts on a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol and the change (movement) of the symbol starts.

In FIG. 13-19 (B), T18 to T19 are execution periods of the activation effect suggesting that the cancellation card is activated (used). T20 to T21 are the period of use of the cancellation card. T22 is the timing at which the cancel card acts on the weak title and the change (destruction) of the weak title starts.

In FIG. 13-20, "fluctuation pattern # 20" is determined as the variation pattern (see FIG. 13-1 (B)), and pseudo-ream (three pseudo-reams) is determined for the pseudo-ream (see FIG. 13-2). ), As a battle production pattern, "BP-K-W8 (medium title-> strong title-> strong battle start-> character movement available-> battle (defeat)-> relief (win))" was decided (Fig. 13-4 (B) ), Fig. 13-6 (C)), "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was decided as an item targeting relief (see Fig. 13-13), and the battle started. "Used, not acquired" was determined as an item targeting "Used, acquired, not acquired" (see Fig. 13-14 (B)), and "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after reach," as an item targeting pseudo-ream. Various timings when "one sheet" is determined (see FIG. 13-16 (B)) are shown. It should be noted that FIG. 13-20 (A) → FIG. 13-20 (B). Further, in the description of FIG. 13-20, some or all of the contents described in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18 will be omitted.

In FIG. 13-20 (A), T1 is the timing at which one cancellation card targeting relief is acquired (displayed). T3 is the timing at which one up card targeting the pseudo-ream is acquired (displayed).

In FIG. 13-20 (A), T5 to T6 are execution periods of the activation effect suggesting that the up card is activated (used). T7 to T8 are the period of use of the up card. T9 is a timing at which the up card acts on a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol and the change (movement) of the symbol starts.

In FIG. 13-20 (B), T24 to T25 are execution periods of the activation effect suggesting that the up card is activated (used). T26 to T27 are the period of use of the up card. The up card is not in stock.

In FIG. 13-20 (B), T34 to T35 are execution periods of the activation effect suggesting that the cancel card is activated (used). T36 to T37 are the period of use of the cancellation card. T38 is a timing at which the cancel card acts on the result display (disappearance) and the change (destruction) of the result display (disappearance) starts.

13-21 and 13-22 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect determination process executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9. The flowchart of FIG. 13-22 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 13-21.

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is non-reach (variation pattern # 10, # 11) or small hit (variation pattern # 16) (step). 011SHS100). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is non-reach or small hit (step 011SHS100; YES), this flowchart ends. When it is determined that it is not a non-reach or a small hit (step 011SHS100; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is super reach (variation patterns # 13 to # 15, # 18 to # 20). (Step 011SH101).

In step 011SH101, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach (step 011SHS101; NO), that is, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (variation patterns # 12, # 17), the effect control CPU 120 is a pseudo-ream. The presence or absence of the above and the number of pseudo-reams are determined (step 011SHS102). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pseudo-relationship at a rate of 80% and the pseudo-relationship (one pseudo-relationship) at a rate of 20%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (presence / absence of pseudo-ream, number of pseudo-reams) (step 011SHS103).

Following step 011SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a pseudo-ream (step 011SHS104). That is, it is determined in step 011SHS102 whether or not it is determined to be pseudo-continuous. When it is determined that there is no pseudo-ream (step 011SHS104; NO), that is, when it is determined that there is no pseudo-ream, this flowchart ends.

When it is determined in step 011SH104 that there is a pseudo-ream (step 011SHS104; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of an item targeting the pseudo-ream based on the fluctuation pattern (step 011SHS105). Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (displacement) (variation pattern # 12), the effect control CPU 120 sets "not used" to 5% as shown in FIG. 13-15 (A). Determined by the ratio, "used, not acquired" is determined at a ratio of 12%, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a ratio of 26%, "used" , Acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card "was determined at a rate of 47%, and" used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card "was determined at a rate of 2%. Yes, with acquisition, cancellation card, immediately after reach, 1 card "is decided at a rate of 8%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach (big hit) (variation pattern # 17), the effect control CPU 120 determines "not used" at a rate of 5% as shown in FIG. 13-15 (B). Then, "used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 15%, "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 25%, and "used, acquired" is determined. , Up card, immediately after reach, 1 card "was determined at a rate of 45%," used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card "was determined at a rate of 2%," used, acquired Yes, cancel card, immediately after reach, 1 card "is decided at a rate of 8%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (presence / absence of an item targeting the pseudo-ream, etc.) (step 011SHS106). Then, this flowchart ends.

When it is determined in step 011SH101 that the fluctuation pattern is super reach (step 011SHS101; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of pseudo-ream and the number of pseudo-reams based on the fluctuation pattern (FIG. 13-22). Step 011SHS110). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-2, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach (weak battle) (fluctuation patterns # 13, # 18), the effect control CPU 120 has a pseudo-continuousness of 30%. Pseudo-repeated (1 pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 40%, and pseudo-repeated (2 pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach (medium battle) (variation patterns # 14, # 19), the effect control CPU 120 determines the pseudo-ream at a rate of 20%, and the pseudo-reach (pseudo-ream). (1 time) is determined at a rate of 30%, pseudo-continuous (2 times of pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 30%, and pseudo-continuous (3 times of pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach (strong battle) (fluctuation patterns # 15, # 20), the effect control CPU 120 determines pseudo-reachability at a rate of 10%, and pseudo-reach (pseudo-ream). (1 time) is determined at a rate of 20%, pseudo-continuous (2 times of pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 30%, and pseudo-continuous (3 times of pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 40%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (presence / absence of pseudo-ream, number of pseudo-reams) (step 011SHS111).

Following step 011SHS111, the effect control CPU 120 determines a battle effect pattern (see FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4) based on the variation pattern (step 011SHS112). Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (weak battle) (fluctuation pattern # 13), the effect control CPU 120 has the battle effect pattern “BP” as shown in FIG. 13-6 (A). -J-L1 "is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle production pattern" BP-J-L2 "is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach (weak battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 18), the effect control CPU 120 has a battle effect pattern “BP-J-” as shown in FIG. 13-6 (A). "W1" is determined at a rate of 40%, battle production pattern "BP-J-W2" is determined at a rate of 30%, battle production pattern "BP-J-W3" is determined at a rate of 20%, and battle The production pattern "BP-J-W4" is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach (medium battle) (fluctuation pattern # 14), the effect control CPU 120 has the battle effect pattern “BP-T-” as shown in FIG. 13-6 (B). "L1" is determined at a rate of 10%, battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" is determined at a rate of 20%, battle production pattern "BP-T-L3" is determined at a rate of 30%, and battle The production pattern "BP-T-L4" is determined at a rate of 40%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 19), the effect control CPU 120 has a battle effect pattern “BP-T-” as shown in FIG. 13-6 (B). "W1" is determined at a rate of 20%, battle production pattern "BP-T-W2" is determined at a rate of 20%, battle production pattern "BP-T-W3" is determined at a rate of 15%, and battle The production pattern "BP-T-W4" is determined at a rate of 15%, the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6" is determined at a rate of 10%. The battle effect pattern "BP-T-W7" is determined at a rate of 5%, and the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W8" is determined at a rate of 5%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach (strong battle) (fluctuation pattern # 15), the effect control CPU 120 has the battle effect pattern “BP-K-” as shown in FIG. 13-6 (C). "L1" is determined at a rate of 5%, battle production pattern "BP-K-L2" is determined at a rate of 10%, battle production pattern "BP-K-L3" is determined at a rate of 15%, and battle The production pattern "BP-K-L4" is determined at a rate of 15%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-L5" is determined at a rate of 25%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-L6" is determined at a rate of 30%. Determined by the ratio of. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach (strong battle) jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 20), the effect control CPU 120 has a battle effect pattern “BP-K-” as shown in FIG. 13-6 (C). "W1" is determined at a rate of 15%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" is determined at a rate of 15%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3" is determined at a rate of 15%. The production pattern "BP-K-W4" is determined at a rate of 9%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W5" is determined at a rate of 8%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W6" is determined at a rate of 8%. The battle production pattern "BP-K-W7" is determined at a ratio of 6%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8" is determined at a ratio of 6%, and the battle production pattern "BP-" is determined. "K-W9" is determined at a rate of 6%, battle production pattern "BP-K-W10" is determined at a rate of 4%, and battle production pattern "BP-K-W11" is determined at a rate of 4%. , The battle production pattern "BP-K-W12" is determined at a rate of 4%.

Following step 011SHS112, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (battle effect pattern) (step 011SHS113).

Following step 011SHS113, in the effect control CPU 120, the battle effect pattern determined in step 011SHS112 includes a battle effect pattern including relief (a battle effect pattern including "relief (win)" in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4. ) (Step 011SHS114). In other words, in step 011SHS112, it is determined whether or not the battle effect pattern for executing the relief effect is determined. Of the battle effect patterns shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, two of the battle effect patterns "BP-J-W3" and "BP-J-W4" shown in FIG. 13-3 (B). Four battle production patterns "BP-T-W5" to "BP-T-W8" in FIG. 13-3 (D), and battle production patterns "BP-K-W7" to "BP-K-W7" in FIG. 13-4 (B). Six of "BP-K-W12" are battle production patterns including relief.

When it is determined in step 011SHS114 that the battle effect pattern includes relief (step 011SHS114; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of an item targeting relief (step 011SHS115). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-13, the effect control CPU 120 determines "not used" at a rate of 1%, "used / not acquired" at a rate of 9%, and " "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 0%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 0%. "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 75%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 15%. .. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (presence / absence of an item targeting relief, etc.) (step 011SHS116).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 011SHS114 that the battle effect pattern does not include relief (step 011SHS114; NO), the process proceeds to step 011SHS117 without executing the processes of step 011SHS115 and step 011SHS116.

Following step 011SHS114 (NO) or step 011SHS116, in the effect control CPU 120, the battle effect pattern determined in step 011SHS112 is a battle effect pattern including the battle completion (“weak title →” in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4. It is determined whether or not the battle effect pattern includes at least one of "medium title" and "medium title-> strong title" (step 011SHS117). In other words, in step 011SHS112, it is determined whether or not the battle effect pattern for executing the battle rise is determined. Of the battle effect patterns shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, two of the battle effect patterns "BP-T-L1" and "BP-T-L3" shown in FIG. 13-3 (C). Four battle production patterns "BP-T-W1", "BP-T-W3", "BP-T-W5", and "BP-T-W7" in FIG. 13-3 (D), FIG. 13-4. Four of the battle production patterns "BP-K-L1", "BP-K-L2", "BP-K-L4", and "BP-K-L5" of (A), of FIG. 13-4 (B). Battle production patterns "BP-K-W1", "BP-K-W2", "BP-K-W4", "BP-K-W5", "BP-K-W7", "BP-K-W8" , "BP-K-W10" and "BP-K-W11" are eight battle production patterns including the start of battle. Further, among the battle effect patterns shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, the battle effect pattern with one battle completion number is the battle effect pattern “BP-TL1” shown in FIG. 13-3 (C). Two of "BP-T-L3", battle production patterns "BP-T-W1", "BP-T-W3", "BP-T-W5", "BP-T" in Fig. 13-3 (D) -W7 ", two battle production patterns" BP-K-L2 "and" BP-K-L5 "in Fig. 13-4 (A), and battle production pattern" BP in Fig. 13-4 (B). -K-W2 "," BP-K-W5 "," BP-K-W8 ", and" BP-K-W11 ". In addition, there are two battle production patterns, "BP-K-L1" and "BP-K-L4" in Fig. 13-4 (A), and Fig. 13-4 (B). There are four battle production patterns "BP-K-W1", "BP-K-W4", "BP-K-W7", and "BP-K-W10".

When it is determined in step 011SHS117 that the battle effect pattern includes the battle completion (step 011SHS117; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the battle effect pattern (number of battle completions) and the item targeting relief (cancellation card). (Presence / absence) and the presence / absence of an item targeting the completion of the battle, etc. are determined (step 011SHS118). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 is "not used" as shown in FIG. 13-14 (A) when the number of battles is one and the item for which relief is targeted is not acquired. Is determined at a rate of 5%, "used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 40%, and "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 10%. , "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 30%. Then, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the production control CPU 120 has one battle rise and the acquisition of an item targeting relief is available, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (B), “not used” is 5%. "Used, not acquired" is determined at a ratio of 20%, "Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a ratio of 10%, and "used" "Yes, with acquisition, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" was decided at a rate of 5%, and "with use, with acquisition, cancellation card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was decided at a rate of 40%. "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is decided at a rate of 20%. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has two battles and no item for which relief is targeted has been acquired, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (C), "not used" is 5%. "Used, not acquired" is determined at a ratio of 20%, "Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a ratio of 10%, and "used" "Yes, with acquisition, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" was decided at a rate of 5%, and "with use, with acquisition, cancellation card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was decided at a rate of 25%. "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 2 cards" was determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 25%. "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards" is decided at a rate of 5%. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has two battles and the item for which the relief is targeted has been acquired, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (D), "not used" is 5%. Determined by the ratio, "used, not acquired" is determined at a ratio of 20%, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a ratio of 10%, "used" , Acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card "was determined at a rate of 5%, and" used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card "was determined at a rate of 5%. "Yes, with acquisition, cancellation card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 2 cards" was decided at a rate of 25%, and "with use, with acquisition, cancellation card, immediately after reach, 1 card" was decided at a rate of 5%. "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards" is decided at a rate of 25%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (presence or absence of an item targeting the completion of the battle, etc.) (step 011SHS119).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 011SHS117 that the battle effect pattern does not include the battle completion (step 011SHS117; NO), the process proceeds to step 011SHS124 without executing the processes of step 011SHS118 and step 011SHS119.

Following step 011SHS117 (NO) or step 011SHS119, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a pseudo-ream (step 011SHS124). That is, it is determined in step 011SHS110 whether or not it is determined to be pseudo-continuous. When it is determined that there is no pseudo-ream (step 011SHS124; NO), that is, when it is determined that there is no pseudo-ream, this flowchart ends.

When it is determined in step 011SH124 that there is a pseudo-ream (step 011SHS124; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the fluctuation pattern and the number of canceled cards acquired (the presence or absence of an item targeting the relief of step 011SHS115). Based on the number of canceled cards acquired and the total number of canceled cards acquired in determining the presence or absence of items targeting the battle completion of step 011SHS118), the presence or absence of items targeting the pseudo-ren is determined (step). 011SHS125). Specifically, in the case of super reach (off) (variation patterns # 13, # 14, # 15), the effect control CPU 120 acquires the number of cancellation cards as shown in FIG. 13-16 (A). Regardless, "not used" is determined at a rate of 6%, "used / not acquired" is determined at a rate of 11%, and "used / acquired / up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" Was determined at a rate of 26%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 47%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card". Is determined at a rate of 2%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 8%. In the case of Super Reach (missing), since there is no relief, the number of canceled cards obtained will not be 3, so the number of canceled cards obtained will be 0 to 2 like Super Reach (big hit). There is no distinction between the case of cards and the case of three cancellation cards. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the case of super reach (big hit) (variation patterns # 18, # 19, # 20) and the number of canceled cards acquired is 0 to 2, FIG. 13-16 (Fig. 13-16). As shown in B), "not used" is determined at a rate of 6%, "used / not acquired" is determined at a rate of 14%, and "used / acquired / upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation," "1 card" is determined at a rate of 25%, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 45%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation" , 1 card is determined at a rate of 2%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 8%. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the case of super reach (big hit) (variation patterns # 18, # 19, # 20) and the number of cancellation cards acquired is 3, FIG. 13-16 (C). As shown in, "not used" is determined at a rate of 6%, "used / not acquired" is determined at a rate of 14%, and "used / acquired / up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card". "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 25%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1" "Number of cards" is determined at a rate of 0%, and "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after reach, 1 sheet" is determined at a rate of 0%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (presence / absence of an item targeting the pseudo-ream, etc.) (step 011SHS126). Then, this flowchart ends.

13-23 to 13-26 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 011SH. Specifically, FIGS. 13-23 to 13-26 show the main scenes in the examples shown in FIGS. 13-19 (A) and 13-19 (B) as an example. That is, the fluctuation pattern is "fluctuation pattern # 14 (out of super reach (middle battle))", and in the effect determination process (FIGS. 13-21, 13-22), the pseudo-ream is pseudo-continuous (pseudo-ream once). ), And "BP-TL3 (weak title-> medium title-> medium battle start-> battle (defeat)") is determined for the battle production pattern, and "used, acquired" for items targeting the battle. Main when "Yes, Cancel Card, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is decided, and "Yes, Acquired, Up Card, Immediately after the start of change, 1 card" is decided for items targeting pseudo-ren. The scene is shown as an example.

In addition, in FIGS. 13-23 to 13-26, FIG. 13-23 (A) → FIG. 13-23 (B) → FIG. 13-23 (C) → FIG. 13-23 (D) → FIG. 13-23 ( E) →, ..., FIG. 13-23 (H) → FIG. 13-24 (A) → FIG. 13-24 (B) → FIG. 13-24 (C) → FIG. 13-24 (D) → FIG. 13-24 (E) →, ..., FIG. 13-24 (H) → FIG. 13-25 (A) → FIG. 13-25 (B) → FIG. 13-25 (C) → FIG. 13-25 (D) → FIG. 13- 25 (E) →, ..., FIG. 13-25 (H) → FIG. 13-26 (A) → FIG. 13-26 (B) → FIG. 13-26 (C) → FIG. 13-26 (D) → FIG. The transition is in the order of −26 (E). Further, in FIG. 13-23 (A) (the same applies to the other figures, the reference numerals are omitted in the other figures), the active display area 011 SHAHA, which is a display area for active display, and the active display 011 SHAH displayed in the active display area 011 SHAHA are shown. Is displayed.

FIG. 13-23 (A) is a scene where the variable display is started (a scene of T0 in FIG. 13-19 (A)). FIG. 13-23 (B) shows a scene (FIG. 13-) in which one up card image 011SHUPC (one up card) and one cancellation card image 011SHCCXLC (one cancellation card) are displayed (stocked). 19 (A) T1 scene). FIG. 13-23 (C) is a scene of reaching (the scene of T2 in FIG. 13-19 (A)).

In FIGS. 13-23 (D) to 13-23 (F), the pseudo-ream effect was performed, and the non-pseudo-ream symbol (normal symbol) "6" different from the pseudo-ream symbol "re" was stopped and displayed. It is a scene (a scene immediately before T4 to T4 in FIG. 13-19 (A)).

13-23 (G) to 13-23 (H) show scenes in which an activation effect suggesting that the up card is activated (used) is being performed (T5 to T6 in FIG. 13-19 (A)). (Scene). Specifically, FIG. 13-23 (G) is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting that the up card is activated is displayed. FIG. 13-23 (H) is a scene (the scene of T6 in FIG. 13-19 (A)) in which the activated image 011SHHD1 is displayed. In FIG. 13-23 (G), for example, the activated image 011SHHD1 is vaguely displayed (for example, it is displayed with a blurred focus, displayed semi-transparently, displayed in monochrome color, etc.). The same applies to FIGS. 13-27 (H) and the like. The same applies to the scene (FIG. 13-25 (B), etc.) in which the activation image 011SHHD2, which suggests that the cancellation card is activated, is displayed.

13-24 (A) to 13-24 (C) are scenes in which the up card is used (scenes T7 to T8 in FIG. 13-19 (A)). Specifically, FIG. 13-24 (A) is a scene in which the display mode of the stocked upcard image 011SHUPC is changed from the normal mode to a notice mode for notifying that the stock is released. FIG. 13-24 (B) shows a scene in which the upcard image 011SHUPC is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen as a notification that the upcard is used. Regarding the change from FIG. 13-24 (A) to FIG. 13-24 (B), for example, the upcard image 011SHUPC at the position shown in FIG. 13-24 (A) is temporarily erased, and at the same time (or after erasing). ), The upcard image 011SHUPC may be displayed at the position of FIG. 13-24 (B), or the upcard image 011SHUPC is enlarged from the position of FIG. 13-24 (A) to the position of FIG. 13-24 (B). You may move it while doing it. FIG. 13-24 (C) is a scene in which the up-card image 011SHUPC acts on the symbol “6” which is the temporary stop symbol. Regarding the change from FIG. 13-24 (B) to FIG. 13-24 (C), for example, the upcard image 011SHUPC at the position shown in FIG. 13-24 (B) is temporarily erased, and at the same time (or after erasing). ), The upcard image 011SHUPC may be displayed at the position of FIG. 13-24 (C), or the upcard image 011SHUPC is reduced from the position of FIG. 13-24 (B) to the position of FIG. 13-24 (C). You may move it while letting it move.

13-24 (D) to 13-24 (F) show a scene (FIG. 13-24) until the up card is used, the middle symbol is updated (UP) by one symbol, and the pseudo-continuous symbol "re" is temporarily stopped. 13-19 (A), scenes T9 to T10). Specifically, FIG. 13-24 (D) is a scene in which the symbol “6” on which the up-card image 011SHUPC acts has started to move. FIG. 13-24 (E) is a scene immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” stops. FIG. 13-24 (F) is a scene in which the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” has stopped.

FIG. 13-24 (G) is a scene in which the revariable display is started (the scene of T11 in FIG. 13-19 (A)). FIG. 13-24 (H) is a scene developed into super reach (a scene of T16 in FIG. 13-19 (A)).

FIG. 13-25 (A) is a scene in which the weak title image 011SHJT is displayed (the scene of T17 in FIG. 13-19 (B)).

13-25 (B) to 13-25 (C) show scenes in which an activation effect suggesting that the cancellation card is activated (used) is being performed (T18 to T19 in FIG. 13-19 (B)). (Scene). Specifically, FIG. 13-25 (B) is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD2, which suggests that the cancellation card is activated, is displayed. FIG. 13-25 (C) is a scene in which the activated image 011SHHD2 is displayed (a scene of T19 in FIG. 13-19 (B)).

13-25 (D) to 13-25 (F) are scenes in which the cancel card is used (scenes T20 to T21 in FIG. 13-19 (B)). Specifically, FIG. 13-25 (D) is a scene in which the display mode of the stocked cancel card image 011SHXLC is changed from the normal mode to a notice mode for notifying that the stock is released. FIG. 13-25 (E) is a scene in which the cancel card image 011SHCXLC is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen as a notification that the cancel card is used. Regarding the change from FIG. 13-25 (D) to FIG. 13-25 (E), for example, the cancel card image 011SHXLC at the position shown in FIG. 13-25 (D) is temporarily erased, and at the same time (or after erasing). ), The cancel card image 011SHXLC may be displayed at the position shown in FIG. 13-25 (E), or the cancel card image 011SHXLC is enlarged from the position shown in FIG. 13-25 (D) to the position shown in FIG. 13-25 (E). You may move it while doing it. FIG. 13-25 (F) is a scene in which the cancel card image 011SHCXLC acts on the weak title image 011SHJT. Regarding the change from FIG. 13-25 (E) to FIG. 13-25 (F), for example, the cancel card image 011SHXLC at the position shown in FIG. 13-25 (E) is temporarily erased, and at the same time (or after erasing). ), The cancel card image 011SHXLC may be displayed at the position shown in FIG. 13-25 (F), or the cancel card image 011SHXLC may be reduced from the position shown in FIG. 13-25 (E) to the position shown in FIG. 13-25 (F). You may move it while letting it move.

13-25 (G) to 13-25 (H) show a scene in which a cancel card is used, the weak title image 011SHJT is canceled, and the medium title image 011SHTT is displayed (FIG. 13-19 (B)). (Scene of T22 to T23). Specifically, FIG. 13-25 (G) is a scene in which the weak title image 011SHJT on which the cancel card image 011SHXLC acted is destroyed. FIG. 13-25 (H) is a scene in which the medium title image 011SHTT is displayed in place of the destroyed weak title image 011SHJT.

FIG. 13-26 (A) is a scene in which the middle battle start image 011SHTBS for notifying the start of the middle battle is displayed (the scene of T30 in FIG. 13-19 (B)). FIG. 13-26 (B) is a scene of offense and defense between a friendly character and character B. FIG. 13-26 (C) is a scene in which a friendly character is defeated. FIG. 13-26 (D) is a scene in which the LOSE image 011SHKH1 notifying the defeat is displayed (the scene of T41 in FIG. 13-19 (B)). 13-26 (E) is a scene in which the out-of-order symbol is displayed (the scene of T42 in FIG. 13-19 (B)).

13-27 to 13-32 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 011SH. Specifically, FIGS. 13-27 to 13-32 show the main scenes in the examples shown in FIGS. 13-20 (A) and 13-20 (B) as an example. That is, the fluctuation pattern is "fluctuation pattern # 20 (super reach (strong battle) jackpot)", and in the production determination process (Fig. 13-21, Fig. 13-22), the pseudo-ream is pseudo-repeated (pseudo-ream 3 times). ), And the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8 (medium title-> strong title-> strong battle start-> character movements-> battle (defeat)-> relief (win))" is decided, and relief is targeted. "Used, acquired, canceled card, 1 card immediately after the start of fluctuation" is determined for the items that have been used, and "used, not acquired" is determined for the items that target the battle, and the pseudo-ren is targeted. This is an example of the main scenes when "Used, Acquired, Upcard, Immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined for the items that have been used.

In addition, in FIGS. 13-27 to 13-32, FIGS. 13-27 (A) →, ..., FIG. 13-27 (H) → FIG. 13-28 (A) →, ..., FIG. 13-28 (H). → Fig. 13-29 (A) →, ..., Fig. 13-29 (H) → Fig. 13-30 (A) →, ..., Fig. 13-30 (H) → Fig. 13-31 (A) →, ..., The transition is in the order of FIG. 13-31 (H) → FIG. 13-32 (A) →, ..., FIG. 13-32 (F).

In the scenes of FIGS. 13-27 to 13-32, some or all of the scenes common to the scenes of FIGS. 13-23 to 13-26 will be omitted.

FIG. 13-27 (A) is a scene where the variable display is started (a scene of T0 in FIG. 13-20 (A)). FIG. 13-27 (B) is a scene (the scene of T1 in FIG. 13-20 (A)) in which one cancellation card image 011SHPXLC (one cancellation card) is displayed (stocked). FIG. 13-27 (C) is a scene of reaching (the scene of T2 in FIG. 13-20 (A)). FIG. 13-27 (D) is a scene (the scene of T3 in FIG. 13-20 (A)) in which one up-card image 011SHUPC (one up-card) is displayed (stocked).

In FIGS. 13-27 (E) to 13-27 (G), the pseudo-ream effect was performed, and the non-pseudo-ream symbol (normal symbol) "6" different from the pseudo-ream symbol "re" was stopped and displayed. It is a scene (a scene immediately before T4 to T4 in FIG. 13-20 (A)).

13-27 (H) to 13-28 (A) show scenes in which an activation effect suggesting that the up card is activated (used) is being performed (T5 to T6 in FIG. 13-20 (A)). (Scene).

13-28 (B) to 13-28 (D) are scenes in which the up card is used (scenes T7 to T8 in FIG. 13-20 (A)).

13-28 (E) to 13-28 (G) show a scene (FIG. 13) until the up card is used, the middle symbol is updated (UP) by one symbol, and the pseudo-continuous symbol "re" is temporarily stopped. 13-20 (A), scenes T9 to T10).

FIG. 13-28 (H) is a scene (the scene of T11 in FIG. 13-20 (A)) in which the revariable display is started.

In FIGS. 13-29 (A) to 13-29 (B), a scene in which a pseudo-ream effect is performed and the pseudo-ream symbol "re" is stopped and displayed (T11 to T12 in FIGS. 13-20 (A)). (Scene). FIG. 13-29 (C) is a scene in which the revariable display is started (a scene of T13 in FIG. 13-20 (A)). 13-29 (D) to 13-29 (E) show a scene in which the pseudo-ream pattern "re" is stopped and displayed (T13 to T14 in FIG. 13-20 (A)). (Scene). FIG. 13-29 (F) is a scene (the scene of T15 in FIG. 13-20 (A)) in which the revariable display is started. FIG. 13-29 (G) is a scene developed into super reach (a scene of T16 in FIG. 13-20 (A)).

FIG. 13-29 (H) is a scene in which the middle title image 011SHTT is displayed (a scene of T23 in FIG. 13-20 (B)).

13-30 (A) to 13-30 (B) show scenes in which an activation effect suggesting that the up card is activated (used) is being performed (T24 to T25 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). Scene). Specifically, FIG. 13-30 (A) is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting that the up card is activated is displayed. FIG. 13-30 (B) is a scene in which the activated image 011SHHD1 is displayed (a scene of T25 in FIG. 13-20 (B)).

13-30 (C) to 13-30 (E) are scenes in which an upcard (non-stock) is used (scenes T26 to T27 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). Specifically, FIG. 13-30 (C) is a scene in which an emergency activation message 011SHEMA foretelling that an unstocked up card will be used (activated) specially (emergency) is displayed. FIG. 13-30 (D) is a scene in which the upcard image 011SHUPC is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen as a notification that the upcard is used. FIG. 13-30 (E) is a scene in which the up-card image 011SHUPC acts on the medium title image 011SHTT.

13-30 (F) to 13-30 (G) show a scene in which the up card is used, the medium title image 011SHTT is updated (UP) by one step, and the strong title image 011SHKT is displayed (FIG. 13). -20 (B) from T28 to T29). Specifically, FIG. 13-30 (F) is a scene in which the medium-strong title image 011SHTKT (an image between the medium-strong title image 011SHTT and the strong title image 011SHKT) is displayed. Regarding the change from the medium title image 011SHTT to the medium strong title image 011SHTKT, for example, the medium title image 011SHTT may be erased once, and at the same time (or after the deletion), the medium strong title image 011SHTKT may be displayed. The appearance (process) of the number of stars increasing from two to three may be displayed in an easy-to-recognize manner by, for example, blinking the third star for a certain period of time. FIG. 13-30 (G) is a scene in which the strong title image 011SHTKT is displayed. Regarding the change from the medium-strong title image 011SHTKT to the strong title image 011SHTKT, for example, the medium-strong title image 011SHTKT may be erased once, and at the same time (or after the deletion), the strong title image 011SHKT may be displayed. The appearance (process) of the change of the enemy character name may be displayed in an easy-to-recognize manner by, for example, blinking the changed enemy character name for a certain period of time.

FIG. 13-30 (H) is a scene in which the strong battle start image 011SHKBS notifying the start of the strong battle is displayed (the scene of T30 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). FIG. 13-31 (A) is a scene of offense and defense between a friendly character and character C. 13-31 (B) is a scene in which the movable body 011SH32 is operating (a scene of T31 to T32 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). FIG. 13-31 (C) is a scene in which a friendly character is defeated. FIG. 13-31 (D) is a scene in which the LOSE image 011SHKH1 notifying the defeat is displayed (the scene of T33 in FIG. 13-20 (B)).

13-31 (E) to 13-31 (F) show scenes in which an activation effect suggesting that the cancel card is activated (used) is being performed (T34 to T35 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). Scene). Specifically, FIG. 13-31 (E) is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD2, which suggests that the cancellation card is activated, is displayed. FIG. 13-31 (F) is a scene in which the activated image 011SHHD2 is displayed (a scene of T35 in FIG. 13-20 (B)).

13-31 (G) to 13-32 (A) are scenes in which the cancel card is used (scenes T36 to T37 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). Specifically, FIG. 13-31 (G) is a scene in which the display mode of the stocked cancel card image 011SHXLC is changed from the normal mode to a notice mode for notifying that the stock is released. FIG. 13-31 (H) is a scene in which the cancellation card image 011SHXLC is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen as a notification that the cancellation card is used. FIG. 13-32 (A) is a scene in which the cancel card image 011SHXLC acted on the LOSE image 011SHKH1.

13-32 (B) is a scene (the scenes of T38 to T39 of FIG. 13-20 (B)) in which the LOSE image 011SHKH on which the cancel card image 011SHXLC acted is destroyed. FIG. 13-32 (C) is a scene in which a friendly character counterattacks character C. FIG. 13-32 (D) is a scene in which a friendly character wins. FIG. 13-32 (E) is a scene in which the WIN image 011SHKH2 notifying the victory is displayed (the scene of T41 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). FIG. 13-32 (F) is a scene in which the jackpot symbol is displayed (the scene of T42 in FIG. 13-20 (B)).

In addition, the example shown in FIGS. 13-30 (A) to 13-30 (E) is an item used without stock (up card used in "with, without acquisition" in FIG. 13-14). And, since the item in stock (cancellation card) is a different type of item, naturally, the item in stock (cancellation card) does not change. Although the illustrations are omitted, even if the item used without stock and the item in stock are of the same type (up card), the item in stock (up card) will be similarly used. There is no change. In other words, the up card in stock is not consumed and the up card is used. The emergency activation message 011SHEMA of FIGS. 13-30 (C) to 13-30 (E) notifies the use of the item used without stock, and the item used without stock and the item in stock. When the items of are of the same type (up card), it also notifies the non-consumption of the item (up card) in stock.

Further, although illustrations and the like are omitted, when displaying (stocking) items of the same type, for example, the items may be displayed so that the quantity can be understood. As an example, "x2" may be displayed in the case of two sheets, and "x3" may be displayed in the case of three sheets.

(About the modified example of the game machine related to the feature unit 011SH)
Subsequently, a modified example of the game machine related to the feature unit 011SH will be described.

(Modification example 1 of feature unit 011SH)
In the above, in the "determination ratio of the presence or absence of items targeting the pseudo-ream", the determination ratio of "not used" is the same (5%) in both the normal reach (missing) and the normal reach (big hit). (Fig. 13-15), the determination rate of "not used" may be higher in the case of normal reach (big hit) than in the case of normal reach (off). Similarly, in the above, an example is described in which the determination rate of "not used" is the same (6%) in both the case of super reach (off) and the case of super reach (big hit) (Fig. 13-16). , In the case of super reach (big hit), the determination rate of "not used" may be higher than in the case of super reach (missing).

(Modification example 2 of feature unit 011SH)
In the above, in the "determination rate of presence / absence of items targeting pseudo-ren", the determination rate of "used / not acquired" is higher in the case of normal reach (big hit) than in the case of normal reach (missing). (Fig. 13-15), the determination ratio of "not used" may be the same in both the normal reach (off) and the normal reach (big hit). Similarly, in the above, an example is described in which the determination rate of "used / not acquired" is higher in the case of super reach (big hit) than in the case of super reach (missing) (Fig. 13-16). , In both the case of super reach (missing) and the case of super reach (big hit), the determination ratio of "used / not acquired" may be the same.

(Modification example 3 of feature unit 011SH)
In the above, an example in which the activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting the activation of the upcard is displayed before the activation (use) of the upcard, and the activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting the activation of the cancellation card is displayed before the activation of the cancel card (that is, , An example of executing different activation effects depending on the item to be activated) has been described, but a common activation effect may be executed regardless of the item to be activated. That is, the type of the item to be activated may not be specified depending on the effect mode of the activation effect.

(Modification example 4 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, an example has been described in which the activation image 011SHHD1 is always displayed when the activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting that the up card is activated is displayed (FIG. 13-23 (G) → FIG. 13-23 (H), FIG. 13-27 (H)-> FIG. 13-28 (A), FIG. 13-30 (A)-> FIG. 13-30 (B), instigating whether the activation image 011SHHD1 is displayed. After that, there may be a case where the activation image 011SHHD1 is not displayed (a fanning of the ghost). That is, even when the activated image 011SHHD1 is not displayed (in the case of Gase), it may be possible to encourage whether the activated image 011SHHD1 is displayed. Similarly, in the above, an example has been described in which the activation image 011SHHD2 is always displayed when the activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting that the cancellation card is activated is displayed (FIG. 13-25 (B). ) → Fig. 13-25 (C), Fig. 13-31 (E) → Fig. 13-31 (F)), when the activation image 011SHHD2 is not displayed after inciting whether the activation image 011SHHD2 is displayed. ) May be present. That is, even when the activated image 011SHHD2 is not displayed (in the case of Gase), it may be possible to encourage whether the activated image 011SHHD2 is displayed.

(Variation example 5 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, an example of executing the activation effect even when an item that has not been acquired (stocked) is used has been described (T24 to T27 in FIGS. 13-20 (B), 13-30 (A) to 13-30 (A) to FIG. (See FIG. 13-30 (E)), when using an item that has not been acquired (stocked), the activation effect may not be executed.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 011SH)
In the above, regardless of whether the target is pseudo-repeated (pseudo-ream 1 time) to pseudo-repeated (pseudo-ream 3 times), both an up card and a cancel card can be acquired as items used as targets. Although an example has been described, the items that can be acquired may be different depending on the number of pseudo-reams. For example, when targeting pseudo-ream (1 pseudo-ream), only upcards can be acquired, and pseudo-repeated (2 pseudo-ream) or pseudo-repeated (3 pseudo-ream) is targeted. In that case, both the up card and the cancel card may be acquired (that is, when the cancel card is used by targeting the pseudo-ream, the pseudo-ream may be confirmed twice or more).

(Modification example 7 of feature unit 011SH)
In the above, when the up card is used with the pseudo-ream as the target, the up-card may or may not be acquired, while when the cancel card is used with the pseudo-ream as the target, the cancel card may be acquired. Explained an example that is always acquired (stocked) (that is, an item that targets a pseudo-ream and is used without stock is always an up card) (see FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16). The cancel card may be used in place of or in addition to the card, targeting the pseudo-ream without stock. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on whether the up card is used with the pseudo-ream as the target and without stock, or the cancel card is used with the pseudo-ream as the target without stock.

(Modification Example 8 of Feature 011SH)
In the above, when the item is used with the pseudo-ream as the target, the pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 1) or the pseudo-repeated (pseudo-ream 3 times) is used. As in the case of (times), an example of using an item in the first pseudo-ream (when the first pseudo-ream “re” is stopped) has been described (see, for example, FIG. 13-17 (A)). , The timing to use the item does not have to be the first pseudo-ream. For example, in the case of pseudo-ream (twice pseudo-ream), the item may be used for the second pseudo-ream without using the item for the first pseudo-ream. Further, in the case of pseudo-ream (three pseudo-reams), the item may be used for the second pseudo-ream (or the third pseudo-ream) without using the item for the first pseudo-ream. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on when the item is used.

(Modification example 9 of feature unit 011SH)
In the above, when the item is used with the pseudo-ream as the target, the item is used once regardless of whether the item is pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 1 time) to pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 3 times). As described above (see FIG. 13-17 (A)), in the case of pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 2 times), the item may be used twice (pseudo-ream 1st time, pseudo-ream 2nd time 2 times). .. Further, in the case of pseudo-ream (three pseudo-ream), the item may be used three times (pseudo-ream 1st to pseudo-ream 3rd 3 times) or 2 times (pseudo-ream 1st to pseudo-ream 3 times). It may be used twice out of the third time in a row). Also, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on how many times the item has been used.
You may.

(Modification example 10 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, when the up card is used to target the battle, the up card may or may not be acquired, while when the cancel card is used to target the battle, the cancel card may not be acquired. Explained an example that is always acquired (stocked) (that is, an item that is used without stock for the battle start is always an up card) (see Fig. 13-14), but instead of an up card or In addition, the cancel card may be used without stock to target the battle. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on whether the up card is used with no stock as the target for the battle or the cancellation card is used without the stock as the target for the battle.

(Modification example 11 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, regardless of whether one up card is used to target the battle, or one cancel card is used to target the battle, the degree of success is the same (both "weak title → medium title" or We have explained an example of "medium title-> strong title" (see Fig. 13-17 (B)), but if the degree of growth differs between the case where the up card is used and the case where the cancellation card is used. You may let me. For example, as a battle production pattern for a strong battle, in addition to a battle production pattern including one stage of "weak title → medium title" and "medium title → strong title", a battle production including two stages of "weak title → strong title" Prepare a pattern, for example, if an upcard is used while a weak title is displayed, it will always go from a weak title to a medium title, while a cancel card was used when the weak title is displayed. In some cases, the title may change from a weak title to a medium title, or from a weak title to a strong title (note that whenever a cancel card is used while a weak title is displayed, it may change. You may try to go from a weak title to a strong title).

(Modification example 12 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, an example of executing the battle start before the start of the battle (an example of updating the title of the battle) has been described (see, for example, FIG. 13-17 (A)), but the battle is replaced or added before the start of the battle. You may execute the rise after the start of the battle. For example, a medium battle may be established in the middle of a weak battle. For example, in the middle of a weak battle with character A, the opponent may change to character B in a medium battle.

(Modification example 13 of feature unit 011SH)
In the above, the number of cancellation cards acquired (stock number) is limited, but the limit may not be set. In other words, if you want to get a cancellation card (1 card) targeting relief and a cancellation card (2 cards) targeting the battle, you can target the 4th pseudo-ream and get a cancellation card (1). Although the acquisition of (sheets) is restricted (see FIG. 13-16 (C)), the restriction may not be provided. Even if there is no limit on the number of cancellation cards that can be obtained, the frequency with which the number of cancellation cards can be obtained is four, depending on the execution rate of the relief effect and the determination rate of the presence or absence of items targeting the pseudo-ream. Is not many.

(Modification example 14 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, the action (movement) caused by the use of the item is not an example (the action dedicated to the use of the item) that is unique to the use of the item. However, I explained that the pseudo-ream notice effect, battle start-up and relief effect are performed even when the item is not used (see Fig. 13-8, Fig. 13-10, Fig. 13-12), but the use of the item. May have a dedicated action by. As an example, the relief effect may be a dedicated action due to the use of the item. Specifically, the determination ratio of "not used" may be set to 0% in the determination ratio (FIG. 13-13) of the presence or absence of items targeting relief. Alternatively, there may be a dedicated action by acquiring (stocking) the item → using it. As an example, the relief effect may be a dedicated action by acquiring and using an item. Specifically, in the determination ratio of the presence / absence of items targeting relief (FIG. 13-13), the determination ratios of "not used" and "used / not acquired" may both be 0%.

(Modification example 15 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, when the item is acquired (stocked), an example of simply displaying the item immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after the reach has been described (for example, FIGS. 13-23 (B), 13-27 (B), 13-27. (See (D)), the effect (item acquisition effect) may be executed when the item is acquired. As the item acquisition effect, for example, options such as "up card x 1", "up card x 2", "up card x 1, cancellation card x 1", "... (missing)" (display contents are the judgment result of item acquisition). Roulette production using roulette with (change as appropriate according to), and walls with "up card x 1" → "cancellation card x 1" → "up card x 1, cancellation card x 1" etc. May be changed as appropriate according to the judgment result of item acquisition), such as repeated button presses that destroy. It is possible to execute one of the item acquisition effects of multiple types of item acquisition effects, and the degree of expectation (the rate at which one or more items can be acquired, a specific item (for example, cancel)) depending on the type of item acquisition effect to be executed. The rate at which the card) can be obtained)) may be different.

(Modification example 16 of the feature portion 011SH)
In the above, the example in which the item acquisition (stock) timing is immediately after the start of fluctuation and immediately after the reach has been described (see, for example, FIG. 13-17 (A)), but the item may be acquired at other timings. The acquisition timing may be one place or three or more places. The acquisition timing may be different depending on the type of item. In addition, a timer may notify the remaining time until the item is used (activated).

(Modification example 17 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, an example in which one item is used for one scene (timing) has been described, but two or more items may be used for one scene. As an example, two or more items of the same type may be used for one scene. The action (movement) caused by the use may be different depending on whether one item is used or two or more items are used. Specifically, for example, two up cards (or two cancellation cards) may be used in a scene where a "weak title" is displayed. When two up cards (or two cancellation cards) are used in the scene where "weak title" is displayed, "weak title" is started at once (without going through "medium title"). It may become a "strong title". As another example, two or more items of different types may be used for one scene. Specifically, for example, an up card (1 card) and a cancel card (1 card) may be used in a scene where a "weak title" is displayed. If an up card (1 card) and a cancel card (1 card) are used in a scene where a "weak title" is displayed, the "weak title" may be changed to a "strong title" at once. .. When the up card and the cancel card are used as described above, a special effect may be performed. For example, when an upcard is used for a "weak title" (when the upcard image 011SHUPC is superimposed on the weak title image 011SHJT (see FIG. 13-11 (D3)), the weak title After displaying the image 011SHJTT (see FIG. 13-11 (E3)), the medium title image 011SHTT is displayed (see FIG. 13-11 (F3)), and when a cancel card is used for the "weak title" (weak). When the cancel card image 011SHXLC is superimposed on the title image 011SHJT (see FIG. 13-11 (D4)), after destroying the weak title image 011SHJT (see FIG. 13-11 (E4)), the middle Although the title image 011SHTT is displayed (see Fig. 13-11 (F4)), if an up card and a cancel card are used for the "weak title", the lightning bolt hits the weak title image 011SHJT directly and the lightning bolt. When the weak title image 011SHJT shines (whites out) due to the direct hit of, and the light subsides (recovers from the whiteout), the strong title image 011SHKT may be displayed in place of the weak title image 011SHJT.

(Modification example 18 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, an example in which there are two types of items (up card and cancel card) has been described, but there may be three or more types of items. For example, in addition to the up card and the cancel card, the accessory card corresponding to the operation of the accessory (movable body 011SH32) may be acquired and used. That is, the character card may be used and acquired by targeting the character. In addition, there are multiple timings as the operation timing of the accessory, and the operation timing (which timing among the multiple timings it operated) and the number of operations (how many timings among the multiple timings it operated) Depending on the situation, the degree of expectation for a big hit (the degree of expectation for winning a battle) may be different.

(Variation Example 19 of Feature 011SH)
In the above, the example in which the item does not change to another type after being displayed (stock) has been described, but the item may change to another type after being displayed (stock). For example, an up card may be displayed immediately after the start of fluctuation, and the up card may be changed to a cancel card immediately after reaching. It may be suggested that the displayed (stocked) item may change to another item. For example, as the display mode of the up card, a normal mode and a special mode different from the normal mode (blinking mode, swing mode, etc.) are prepared, and when the display mode of the up card is a special mode, it is a normal mode. It may be easier to change to a cancellation card than sometimes.

(Modification example 20 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, an example in which the item type (up card, cancel card) can be identified at the time when the item display starts (stock start) has been described, but even if the item type cannot be identified at the time when the item display starts. Good. For example, the type of some or all of the displayed cards may not be identifiable at the start of display, and the type may be identifiable at any timing until the card is used. For example, at the timing of the display start, the back side of the common symbol whose card type cannot be identified is displayed, and at the timing after the execution of the activation effect, the front surface where the card type can be identified (FIGS. 13-7 (A) (B). ) May be displayed. In addition to displaying the up card and cancel card on the back side, the Gase card (the display mode on the front side is "..." etc., but the display mode on the back side is the same as the up card and cancel card. The card) may be displayed on the back side. The Gase card may be erased when it becomes identifiable as a Gase card (after the surface is displayed). In addition, the fluctuation of the Gase card may end (erased at the end of the fluctuation) with the back side as it is.

(Modification example 21 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, the example of displaying the item (up card, cancel card) in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 has been described, but it may be displayed in another position. For example, it may be displayed in the vicinity of the active display area 011SHAHA (see FIG. 13-23) (for example, the upper part of the active display 011SHAH). The display position may be different depending on the type of item and the number of acquired (stock) items.

(Modification example 22 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, an example in which the usage scene of the item (up card, cancellation card) is a pseudo continuous production, a battle rise or a relief production has been described (see FIG. 13-7 (C)), but instead of the above scene or In addition, the item may be used in other situations. That is, in the above, an example of using and acquiring an item as a target for pseudo-ream, battle completion, and relief has been described (FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16), but an item is used and acquired as a target for other events. You may do so. For example, the item may be used and acquired by targeting the change of the active display or the hold display. That is, the active display or the like may be changed by using the up card or the like. In addition, the display mode of the active display etc. is changed by directly acting the item to be used on the active display etc. (for example, performing an effect of reducing the up card etc. and displaying it on the active display etc.). Alternatively, the item to be used may be indirectly acted on the active display or the like (for example, an arrow appears by using an up card or the like, and the arrow is pierced by the active display or the like) to perform the active display. Etc. may be changed. It can be said that the latter aspect (indirectly acting mode) uses and acquires an item with the target of executing an action effect that changes the active display or the hold display. Also, for example, the color that suggests the jackpot expectation (the color of the entire background or the periphery during the battle production, the game effect lamp 9, etc. The jackpot expectation is in the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow. Items may be used and acquired by targeting changes such as high). That is, the above color change may be performed by using an up card or the like. Further, for example, the item may be used and acquired by targeting the operation (operation validity period) by the operation means (including various buttons, operation rods, guns, swords, etc.). That is, the effect including the operation by the operation means may be executed by using the up card or the like. Also, the item may be used after the end of the variable display. For example, the item may be used and acquired by targeting the promotion effect (round promotion effect, probabilistic promotion effect).

(Modification example 23 of feature unit 011SH)
Although the explanation is omitted above, the item may be used and acquired in relation to the setting value suggestion. As an example, setting values may be suggested based on the frequency of item use and acquisition. For example, depending on the set value (for example, depending on whether the set value is "1" or the set value "2" or more, whether the set value is "3" or less or the set value "4" or more. Depending on whether the set value is even or odd, etc.), the percentage of items used (eg, "used" or "used" in some or all of FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16. The rate of determination of "no") or the rate of items being displayed (stocked) (for example, the rate of determination of "acquisition" or "no acquisition" in some or all of FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16) May be different. As another example, the setting value may be suggested based on the result of using the item. For example, in the above, an example in which the relief effect is always executed by using the cancel card after the defeat is notified in the battle effect (an example of winning and becoming a big hit) has been described, but after the defeat is notified in the battle effect. There are cases where the relief effect is not executed even if you use the cancel card (when the defeat remains and you are out of the game), and if the relief effect is not executed even if you use the cancel card after the defeat is notified in the battle effect, now It is also possible to suggest the set value of (for example, display an image or the like suggesting the set value). It should be noted that an item (setting suggestion card) that is used and acquired for executing the set value suggestion effect that suggests the set value may be prepared. For example, when an eye-catching image (an eye-catching image in a normal display mode common to all set values) is displayed (when it is definitely notified that the super reach has been lost), the setting suggestion card is displayed. Is activated (used), and the display mode of the eye-catching image being displayed (normal display mode common to the set values) may be changed to a special display mode (suggestion display mode suggesting the set value).

(Modification example 24 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, the example in which the item is a card (up card, cancellation card) has been described, but the item does not have to be a card. For example, a medal (for example, a medal that can identify each of a plurality of types) may be displayed and acquired as an item, or a gacha (for example, a gacha that can identify which of a plurality of types of contents is contained). May be displayed.

(Modification example 25 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, the item and the like are determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 9, 13-21 and 13-22), but the item is determined in the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). Etc. may be decided. When deciding an item or the like in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), instead of the fluctuation pattern, a symbol specification command (whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the big hit type (probability change or non-probability change) The item or the like may be determined based on the contents of the effect control command indicating the determination result of (or sudden) or the variation category specification command (the effect control command indicating the category (type) of the determined variation pattern). It should be noted that a plurality of items may be collectively determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one item may be determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of each start winning. That is, a plurality of items may be associated with one variation, or one item may be associated with each variation.

(Application to other devices)
Although the example of applying to a pachinko gaming machine has been described above, it can also be applied to a slot machine. In one state (for example, a non-advantageous state), for example, periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range), another state (for example, an advantageous state, for example, a bonus game, AT, ART). , RT, etc.) may be proved as an enemy in a slot machine that draws a lottery.

(011SH slot machine)
For example, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects suggesting that they are controlled in an advantageous state, and before the specific effects are executed, a plurality of types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effects can be performed. The first specific effect (for example, each game within a fixed number of games before the final battle is selected) that can be executed and a plurality of types of specific effects can be executed (for example, each game). Experience value acquisition production etc. that can acquire experience points. One of the final battles with different winning ratios is selected according to the experience value. The more experience points, the easier it is to select an advantageous final battle). A second specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than the timing (for example, one or more games in which the final battle is selected) (a rising effect that can change the once selected final battle to a more advantageous final battle) And the third specific effect (relief effect that leads to victory from defeat) that can be executed at a timing after the predetermined timing (for example, the last game of the final battle), and the multiple types of suggestive effects are the first. The first suggestion effect includes one suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) and a second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) which is more expected to be controlled in an advantageous state than the first suggestion effect. When the suggestion effect is continuously executed up to a predetermined timing, the first specific effect can be executed in relation to the first suggestion effect, and the first suggestion effect continues until a timing after the predetermined timing. When the second suggestion effect is executed continuously until the predetermined timing, the second specific effect can be executed in relation to the first suggestion effect, and when the second suggestion effect is continuously executed, in relation to the second suggestion effect. The first specific effect can be executed, and when the second suggestion effect is continuously executed until a timing after a predetermined timing, the third specific effect can be executed in relation to the second suggestion effect. Yes, when the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are executed at a predetermined timing, at least the first specific effect is executed in relation to the first suggestion effect at a predetermined timing, and after the predetermined timing. The first pattern of executing the second specific effect in relation to the second suggestion effect at the timing of (for example, up card and cancel card in each game within the fixed number of games and before the final battle is selected). If is in stock, each game will use an up card to perform experience point acquisition effects, and in the game where the final battle is selected, a cancel card will be used. (Pattern for executing the sword effect) and the first specific effect related to the first suggestion effect at a predetermined timing, and the third specific effect related to the second suggestion effect at a timing later than the predetermined timing. If the second pattern to be executed (for example, each game within a fixed number of games and each game before the final battle is selected has up cards and cancellation cards in stock, the up cards are used in each game. In the final game of the final battle, the experience value acquisition effect is executed, and the rescue effect is executed using the cancel card), and the specific effect can be executed, and the third specific effect (relief effect) is executed. The timing to be performed may be a timing after the timing at which the second specific effect (rise effect) is executed. There are multiple types of battle effects for pachinko machine 1, such as "weak battle", "medium battle", and "strong battle" with different reliability (Fig. 13-1, Fig. 13-3 to Fig. 13-). (Refer to 4), it is assumed that there are a plurality of types having different reliability in the final battle in the above slot machines, and the second specific effect is an effect that leads to a more reliable final battle. If you win the final battle, you will be controlled to your advantage.

(012SH slot machine)
For example, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects suggesting that they are controlled in an advantageous state, and before the specific effects are executed, a plurality of types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effects can be performed. It is feasible, and multiple types of specific effects are less expected to be controlled in a more advantageous state than the first specific effect (for example, relief effect relief that leads to victory from defeat in the final battle) and the first specific effect. The first timing (for example, the final battle) includes the second specific effect (such as a rising effect that can change the final battle once selected to a more advantageous final battle) and the suggestive effect (for example, the effect by cancel card). It is possible to execute the first specific effect in relation to the suggestion effect when it is being executed in the last game, etc.), and the suggestion effect (for example, the effect by cancel card or up card) is more than the first timing. When executed at the previous second timing (for example, one or more games in which the final battle is selected), the second specific effect can be executed in relation to the suggestion effect, and the second specific effect can be executed. , The first pattern (pattern with one rise) to be executed once in relation to the suggestion effect (for example, effect by cancel card or up card) and the suggestion effect (for example, effect by cancel card or up card) It is possible to execute with the second pattern (pattern with two rises) that is executed multiple times in relation to, and the case where the second specific effect is executed in the second pattern is the second in the first pattern. It suffices if the expectation that the specific effect is controlled is higher than when the specific production is executed (if the final decisive battle is completed twice, it will be the final decisive battle corresponding to the "strong battle", so the expectation degree. Is high). There are multiple types of battle effects for pachinko machine 1, such as "weak battle", "medium battle", and "strong battle" with different reliability (Fig. 13-1, Fig. 13-3 to Fig. 13-). (Refer to 4), it is assumed that there are a plurality of types having different reliability in the final battle in the above slot machines, and the second specific effect is an effect that leads to a more reliable final battle. If you win the final battle, you will be controlled to your advantage.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 011SH)
(Means 1 relating to feature unit 011SH)
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, bonus game, etc.), and a plurality of types of specific effects suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled. It is feasible, and before the specific effect is executed, a plurality of types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effect can be executed, and the plurality of types of the specific effect can be executed at a predetermined timing. A first specific effect that can be executed (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 13-8, 13-9, etc.) and a second specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than a predetermined timing (for example, FIG. 13-10, the effect of the battle rising shown in FIGS. 13-11, etc.) and the third specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing (for example, the relief effect shown in FIG. 13-12, etc.) The plurality of types of the suggestion effect are controlled to be more advantageous than the first suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the up card shown in FIG. 13-7 (A)) and the first suggestion effect. The first suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the up card) including the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card shown in FIG. 13-7 (B)) having a high degree of expectation is predetermined. When continuously executed until the timing, the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) can be executed in connection with the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card). When the first suggestion effect is continuously executed until a timing after a predetermined timing, the second specific effect (for example, a battle) is related to the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card). It is possible to perform an upstart effect (for example, FIGS. 13-7 (C), 13-9 (G4) to 13-9 (L4), 13-11 (B3) to 13-11 (Fig. 13-11). G3), FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-15, FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-17, FIG. 13-22, etc.), the second suggestion effect (for example, effect by a cancel card) continues until a predetermined timing. When executed, the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) can be executed in connection with the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card), and the second suggestion is performed. When the effect is continuously executed until a timing after the predetermined timing, the third specific effect (for example, a relief effect) is performed in connection with the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect using a cancel card). It is feasible (eg, Figure 1). 3-7 (C), FIGS. 13-9 (G5) to 13-9 (L5), 13-12 (B2) to 13-12 (G2), 13-13, 13-15, FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-17, FIG. 13-22, etc.), the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) and the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) at a predetermined timing. When it is executed, at least at a predetermined timing, the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) is executed in connection with the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card), and a predetermined effect is performed. The first pattern (for example, pseudo-ream) that executes the second specific effect (for example, the effect of completing a battle) in relation to the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by a cancel card) at a timing later than the timing. In the battle production pattern including the production and the battle completion, the pattern when the up card is determined by targeting the pseudo-continuous production and the cancel card is determined by targeting the battle completion (see FIGS. 13-14 and 13-16). Then, the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) is executed in connection with the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) at a predetermined timing, and at a timing later than the predetermined timing. A second pattern (for example, a pseudo continuous effect, a battle effect pattern including a rescue effect) for executing the third specific effect (for example, a rescue effect) in relation to the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card). In the case where the up card is determined by targeting the pseudo continuous effect and the cancel card is determined by targeting the relief effect (patterns in FIGS. 13-13 and 13-16), the specific effect can be executed. Yes, the timing at which the third specific effect (for example, a relief effect) is executed is a timing after the timing at which the second specific effect (for example, an effect at the beginning of a battle) is executed (FIG. 13). -17 etc.).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. That is, in each of the different types of suggestion images, an individual specific effect (first specific effect, second specific effect) and a common specific effect (third specific effect) are executed, so that the suggestive image can be displayed. It is possible to increase the variation of the production and improve the game entertainment without excessively limiting.

(Means 2 pertaining to feature unit 011SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 1 executes the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) in connection with the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) and the second The first specific effect (for example, pseudo-continuous notice) is different from the case where the first specific effect (for example, pseudo-continuous notice effect) is executed in relation to the suggestive effect (for example, effect by a cancel card). (Direction, etc.) is executed (Fig. 13-9).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Means 3 for Feature 011SH)
In the game machines of the means 1 and the above means 2, the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) and the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) are executed at a predetermined timing. In some cases, only the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) is executed at a predetermined timing, and in some cases, the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) is later than the predetermined timing. The ratio of whether or not the execution is continued until the timing of (FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16) is different. For example, before the start of the pseudo-ream effect, the up card and the cancel card are stocked, and when only the cancel card is stocked, the cancel card is stocked after the pseudo-ream effect ends. The ratios shown are not the same (the determination ratios in FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16 are not intentionally made the same). Alternatively, since it is difficult to determine the up card by targeting the battle completion and the cancel card by targeting the pseudo-ream effect, if the up card and the cancel card are stocked before the start of the pseudo-ream effect. There is a high possibility that the up card is the target of the pseudo-continuous production, and there is a high possibility that the cancellation card is in stock at the end of the pseudo-continuous production. On the other hand, if only the cancel card is stocked before the start of the pseudo-ream effect, the pseudo-ream effect occurs more frequently than the battle starts (because the pseudo-ream effect is also executed in the normal reach). It is relatively likely that the cancel card is the target of the pseudo-ream effect, and it is not likely that the cancel card is in stock at the end of the pseudo-ream effect.

According to the game machine, attention can be paid to the type of suggestive effect when the first specific effect is executed.

(Means 4 for Feature 011SH)
When the gaming machine of the above means 1 to 3 executes the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect), the gaming machine is related to the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card). The ratio to be executed and the ratio to be executed in relation to the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card) are different (FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16).

According to the game machine, the first specific effect can be executed in connection with the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect according to the psychology of the player.

(Means 5 for Feature 011SH)
The gaming machines of means 1 to 4 can execute a notification effect (for example, an activation effect shown in FIGS. 13-17) that notifies that the specific effect is executed in connection with the suggestion effect. Yes (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (H) to 13-24 (F), in connection with the stock of upcards (that is, the stocked upcards are used). It is possible to display the activation image 011SHHD1 notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (in connection with), and as shown in FIGS. 13-25 (C) to 13-25 (H), the cancel card is It is also possible to display the activation image 011SHHD2 notifying that the battle is about to take place in relation to being in stock (ie, in connection with the use of the stocked cancel card). As shown in −28 (A) to 13-23 (G), pseudo in relation to the stock of upcards (that is, in relation to the use of stocked upcards). It is possible to display the activation image 011SHHD1 notifying that the continuous effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-31 (F) to 13-32 (E), the cancellation card is stocked. In connection with (that is, in connection with the use of the stocked cancel card), the activation image 011SHHD2 notifying that the relief effect is executed can be displayed), and the suggestion effect is not executed. Even so, the notification effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-30 (B) to 13-30 (G), when the up card is not stocked (that is, up as an emergency activation). Even when the card is used), the activation image 011SHHD1 can be displayed), and if the notification effect is executed when the suggestion effect is not executed, the specific effect equal to or higher than a predetermined expected value is performed. To execute. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 13-15, the determination ratio of targeting the pseudo-continuous production without stocking the up card is 12% for the normal reach (missing) and 15% for the normal reach (big hit). Yes, the percentage of decisions to stock up cards and target them for pseudo-continuous production is 73% (26% + 47%) for normal reach (missing) and 70% (25% + 45%) for normal reach (big hit). .. Therefore, the reliability of the pseudo-ream effect when an unstocked upcard is used and the pseudo-ream effect is executed is the pseudo-ream when the non-stock upcard is used and the pseudo-ream effect is executed. Higher than the reliability of the production. In other words, when a non-stocked up card is used and a pseudo-ream effect is executed, the reliability of the jackpot by the pseudo-ream effect is a predetermined value expected value (a pseudo-ream effect using a stocked up card). The reliability of the jackpot by the pseudo-continuous production when is executed) or more.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. For example, a card that is not in stock may be used and a specific effect may be executed (a specific effect is executed as a surprise), and the specific effect (a specific effect generated as a surprise) is equal to or greater than a predetermined expected value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to lack of stock.

(Means 6 for Feature 011SH)
In the game machines of the above means 1 to 5, the suggestion effect can be started at a plurality of types of timings, and at which timing the execution is started according to the type of the suggestion effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16, the determination ratio of the display (stock) timing differs depending on the type of card. Also, it is used depending on the type of card. Timing (ie, target) decision rates are different).

According to the game machine, since the suggestion effect is executed at various timings during the game, it is possible to give a sense of expectation at various timings.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 012SH)
(Means 1 relating to feature unit 012SH)
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, bonus game, etc.), and a plurality of types of specific effects suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled. It is feasible, and before the specific effect is executed, a plurality of types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effect can be executed, and the plurality of types of the specific effect are the first specific effects. An effect (for example, a relief effect shown in FIGS. 13-12 and the like) and a second specific effect (for example, FIGS. 13-10 and 13) having a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first specific effect. At the first timing (for example, the scene where "LOSE image 011SHKH1" is displayed), the suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card) includes the effect of the battle completion shown in -11 and the like. When being executed, the first specific effect (for example, a relief effect) can be executed in relation to the suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card or a cancel card) is the first. When the game is executed at the second timing (for example, the scene where the title of the battle effect is displayed) before the first timing, the second specific effect (for example, the battle is completed) is related to the suggestion effect. The first specific effect (for example, the effect of the battle) is executed once in connection with the suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the up card or the cancel card). Executed multiple times in relation to the pattern (for example, a pattern in which a stocked card is used to execute a battle once, etc., see FIG. 13-14) and the suggestion effect (for example, an effect using an up card or a cancel card). It can be executed with the second pattern (for example, a pattern in which a stocked card is used to complete a battle and is executed twice. See FIG. 13-14), and the second specific effect is executed in the second pattern. In this case, the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than in the case where the second specific effect is executed in the first pattern (the two battles are a strong battle, which is advantageous. Expectations for being controlled by the state are high (FIGS. 13-1, 13-3, 13-4).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the interest of the game can be improved. That is, when the second specific effect, which has a lower expectation than the first specific effect, is executed, the expectation is higher than when it is executed once by repeatedly executing the second specific effect, which raises the expectation of the player. Alternatively, it can be sustained and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 2 pertaining to feature 012SH)
In the game machine of the above means 1, the first pattern (for example, the effect of the battle completion) is related to the suggestion effect (for example, the effect of the up card or the cancel card). A pattern in which the stocked cards are used one by one to execute the battle once. Here, a pattern in which the two stocked cards are used to execute the battle twice, that is, the first time is also the second time. The case where the upstart is also executed in the pattern executed by using the stock) is the case where the second specific effect is executed in the second pattern in relation to the suggestion effect (for example, the stocked 1). The first specific effect (for example, a relief effect) is executed rather than a pattern or the like in which one card is used to execute the battle twice, that is, a pattern in which the second process is executed without using stock). Cheap. For example, in the case of the two rises shown in FIGS. 13-14 (C) and 13-14 (D), in the case of "acquisition of an item targeting relief (FIG. 13-14 (D))". Is more frequent than "when no item is acquired for relief (Fig. 13-14 (C))" for both the first and second rises using stock (that is, "use". Yes, with acquisition, cancellation card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 2 cards "or" with use, with acquisition, cancellation card, immediately after reach, 2 cards ") is high), and stock is not used for the second rise (That is, the rate at which "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" or "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined) is low. Therefore, when both the first rise and the second rise are executed using the stock, the relief effect is more likely to be executed than when the second rise is executed without using the stock. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (A) and 13-14 (B), even in the case of one rise, when the rise is executed using the stock, the stock is not used. The relief effect is easier to execute than when the rise is executed. In other words, if the rise is executed without using the stock, it becomes difficult to execute the relief effect.

According to the game machine, when the first pattern having a low expectation is executed, the ratio of the first specific effect being executed is high, so that the expectation can be maintained.

(Means 3 for Feature 012SH)
In the game machines of means 1 and means 2, the suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card or a cancel card) is higher than the second timing (for example, a scene where the title of the battle effect is displayed). Execution can be started at the previous third timing (for example, a scene immediately after reach) and the fourth timing before the third timing (for example, a scene immediately after the start of fluctuation) (up card). And the cancel card can be displayed (stocked) in the scene immediately after the start of fluctuation, the scene immediately after reach, etc.), and the third timing (for example, the scene immediately after reach) and the fourth timing (for example, the start of fluctuation). The second specific effect (for example, the effect of completing a battle) is a pattern of either the first pattern or the second pattern, depending on when the execution is started (such as the scene immediately after). The percentage of executions in is different (see, for example, Figures 13-14).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the execution of the suggestion effect is started.

(Means 4 for Feature 012SH)
In the gaming machines of means 1 to 3 described above, the second specific effect (for example, the effect of completing a battle) is the first of other advance notice effects being executed when the second specific effect is being executed. It is an effect of changing from an aspect to a second aspect having a higher degree of expectation than the first aspect (see, for example, FIG. 13-11).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 5 for Feature 012SH)
In the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 4, the second specific effect after the first time executed in the second pattern is executed without being related to the suggestion effect. For example, in the two battles shown in FIGS. 13-14 (C) and 13-14 (D), "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "used, acquired". If "Yes, Cancel card, Immediately after reach, 1 card" is decided, 1 cancel card is used and the upstart is executed twice. Specifically, the cancellation card stocked at the time of the first rise is consumed. Therefore, at the time of the second rise, it is executed without consuming the stocked cancellation card (that is, regardless of the stock of the cancel card).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to improve the interest. In other words, since the card is used without stock, the feeling of surprise is outstanding and the interest can be improved.

(Means 6 for Feature 012SH)
In the game machines of the above means 1 to 5, the suggestion effect can be started at a plurality of types of timings, and at which timing the execution is started according to the type of the suggestion effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16, the determination ratio of the display (stock) timing differs depending on the type of card. Also, it is used depending on the type of card. Timing (ie, target) decision rates are different).

According to the game machine, since the suggestion effect is executed at various timings during the game, it is possible to give a sense of expectation at various timings.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A game machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effect before the specific effect is executed.
Multiple types of the specific effects
The first specific effect that can be executed at a predetermined timing,
A second specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing,
Including the third specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing,
Multiple types of the above-mentioned suggestive effects
The first suggestion production and
Including the second suggestion effect, which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first suggestion effect.
When the first suggestion effect is continuously executed up to a predetermined timing, the first specific effect can be executed in relation to the first suggestion effect, and the first suggestion effect is later than the predetermined timing. The second specific effect can be executed in relation to the first suggestion effect when it is continuously executed until the timing of.
When the second suggestion effect is continuously executed up to a predetermined timing, the first specific effect can be executed in relation to the second suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is later than the predetermined timing. When the third specific effect is continuously executed up to the timing of, the third specific effect can be executed in relation to the second suggestion effect.
When the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are executed at a predetermined timing, at least,
A first pattern in which the first specific effect is executed in relation to the first suggestion effect at a predetermined timing, and the second specific effect is executed in relation to the second suggestion effect at a timing later than the predetermined timing. When,
A second pattern in which the first specific effect is executed in relation to the first suggestion effect at a predetermined timing, and the third specific effect is executed in relation to the second suggestion effect at a timing later than the predetermined timing. And, the specific effect can be executed with
A gaming machine characterized in that the timing at which the third specific effect is executed is a timing after the timing at which the second specific effect is executed.

Images